Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPlans (3) BEGEt'lED Lva NOV 14 2013 C1M(p�TIGARD PROJECT MANUAL BUILDING DIVISION DIVISIONS 00 - 32 PERMIT SE PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTEND, OREGON e,OP --002g� City of Tigard A .ro edfIans By ..Wit Date l2 cwt l t By ( 0 ti +.1 l:›TJ OFFICE COPY 4 DAk� Prepared by: ttS RO L.THOMPSON rI TVA Architects Inc. .920 SW Sixth Avenue, • Suite 1500 o AND oR0' Portland, Oregon 97204 503,220.0668 4OF00 November 8, 2013 PROJECT MANUAL FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF: Pacific Parkway Center PORTLAND, OREGON OWNER ARCHITECT Pac Trust TVA Architects,Inc. 15350 SW Sequoia Parkway,Suite 300 920 SW Sixth Ave., Suite 1500 Portland OR 97224 Portland OR 97204 Ph: 503.624.7755 Ph: 503.220.0668 Contact: Dick Krippaehne Contact: Bob Thompson,Principal in Charge Pam Saftler,Project Manager CIVIL ENGINEER STRUCTURAL ENGINEER WH Pacific Engineers ABHT Structural Engineers 9755 SW Barnes Road 1640 NW Johnson Portland OR 97225 Portland OR 97209 Ph: 503.626.0455 Ph: 503.467.4980 Contact: Brady Berry,Civil Engineer Contact: Clinton Ambrose M/E/P ENGINEER Glumac 900 SW Fifth Ave.,Suite 1600 Portland OR 97204 Ph: 503.227.5280 Contact: Leonard Klein PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00-BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00 50 00 FORM OF AGREEMENT 00 70 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 80 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DIVISION 01 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 01 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 02 00 ALLOWANCES 01 02 50 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01 02 60 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01 03 00 LISTED ALTERNATES 01 03 20 VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES 01 04 10 PROJECT COORDINATION 01 04 50 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 05 00 FIELD ENGINEERING 01 09 00 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS 01 09 10 EXPLANATIONS AND DEFINITIONS 01 20 00 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 00 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 01 34 00 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 01 37 00 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 54 00 PROJECT SECURITY 01 56 39 TEMPORARY PLANT PROTECTION 01 60 00 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01 63 00 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01 70 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 71 00 CLEANING AND TRASH REMOVAL 01 72 00 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 73 00 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 74 00 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT DIVISION 02-SITE CONSTRUCTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION DIVISION 03-CONCRETE 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 04-MASONRY NOT USED DIVISION 05-METALS 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 06-WOOD AND PLASTICS 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY AND SHEATHING 06 18 50 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER TABLE OF CONTENTS 13117 SECTION 00 01 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 1700 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS 07 54 23 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08-DOORS AND WINDOWS 08 00 00 DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE 08 12 16 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 36 13 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 08 62 00 UNIT SKYLIGHTS 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 80 00 GLASS AND GLAZING DIVISION 09-FINISHES 09 25 13 ELASTOMERIC FINISH SYSTEM 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 77 00 FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PANELS 09 91 00 PAINTING 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES DIVISION 11-EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS DIVISION 21-FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN-BUILD-FIRE PROTECTION DIVISION 22-PLUMBING 22 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN-BUILD-PLUMBING DIVISION 23-HEATING,VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN-BUILD-HVAC DIVISION 26-ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN-BUILD-ELECTRICAL DIVISION 27-ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY DIVISION 28-ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY NOT USED DIVISION 31-EARTHWORK 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 31 20 00 EARTHWORK TABLE OF CONTENTS 13117 SECTION 00 01 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 32-EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 32 80 00 IRRIGATION 32 91 13 SOIL PREPARATION END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS 13117 SECTION 00 01 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON FORM OF AGREEMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 AGREEMENT A. The Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor for the Work of this Project will be executed on a modified AIA Form A102—Guaranteed Maximum Price. END OF SECTION FORM OF AGREEMENT 13117 SECTION 00 50 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 FORM A. The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A-201, 1997 edition are included herein by reference. The Contractor and all Sub-Contractors shall read and be governed by them,as revised. END OF SECTION GENERAL CONDITIONS 13117 SECTION 00 70 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 STATUS OF GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Supplements which modify,change,delete from or add to AIA Document A201,General Conditions of the Contract for Construction(Fifteenth Edition 1997),are available for viewing at the offices Of PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER. B. Where any article, Paragraph, Subparagraph, Clause, Subclause or item of the A201 form is modified, changed,deleted from or added to by the Supplementary General Conditions,the unaltered provisions of that article,Paragraph,Subparagraph,Clause,Subclause or item shall remain in effect. C. Where any part of the A201 is in conflict with the Supplementary General Conditions,the Supplementary General Conditions shall govern. END OF SECTION SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 13117 SECTION 00 80 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SUMMARY OF WORK PART I -GENERAL 1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of the Contract comprises site and building construction for the Pacific Parkway Center in Portland,Oregon. 1.2 CONTRACT A. If Work described herein is awarded,successful Bidder and PacTrust shall execute a contract in the form included in the Bidding Documents issued by the Owner. 1.3 WORK PERFORMED BY OWNER A. Concurrently with Work of this Contract: 1. Products furnished and installed by Owner: a. Work identified on Drawings as Owner Furnished/Owner Installed(OF/OI or OFOI). 1.4 WORK BY OTHERS UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT A. Concurrently with work of this Contract: 1. Security system. 1.5 WORK SCHEDULE A. Coordinate construction schedule with Owner. 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A. When necessary and when directed,move any stored products, which are under Contractor's control, and which interfere with operations of Owner or separate Contractor. 1.8 PROTECTING EXISTING STRUCTURES A. Drawings indicate approximate location of any known structures before starting work. Contractor shall determine exact location of any structure that would be damaged by contract work. B. Contractor shall use caution when working adjacent to existing structures. If unknown structures are encountered,immediately request disposition instructions from Architect. C. If existing structures are damaged, repair or replace as directed. Additional compensation and/or extensions of time,if any,caused by repair or replacement will be determined in accordance with General Contractors. 1.9 PROTECTING EXISTING UTILITIES A. Drawings indicate approximate location of any known, concealed utility lines. Before starting work, Contractor shall determine exact location of any of these lines that could be damaged by Contract Work. SUMMARY OF WORK 13117 SECTION 01 01 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08 13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SUMMARY OF WORK I B. Contractor shall assume that other unknown utility lines do exist, and Contractor shall proceed with caution when working in areas that could conceal unknown utilities. If such utility lines are encountered, immediately request disposition instructions from Architect. C. If utility lines are damaged,remove,repair,or replace lines as directed. Additional compensation and/or extensions of time, if any, caused by removing, repairing, or replacing lines will be determined in accordance with General Conditions. END OF SECTION I I I I 1 I SUMMARY OF WORK 13117 SECTION 01 01 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ALLOWANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Selected materials and equipment may be specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. 2. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. 3. If necessary,additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances include lump-cost allowances. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Change Order Procedures" specifies procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise the Architect of the date when the final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. Purchase products and systems selected by the Architect from the designated supplier. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show the actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. PART 2-PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly upon delivery for damage or defects. ALLOWANCES 13117 SECTION 01 02 00- 1 PERMIT ssr 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ALLOWANCES 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. END OF SECTION ALLOWANCES 13117 SECTION 01 02 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Owner-Contractor Agreement: Section 00 50 00. B. General Conditions: Section 00 70 00. C. Summary of Work: Section 01 01 00. D. Schedule of Values: Section 01 37 00. E Contract Closeout: Section 01 70 00. 1.2 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED A. Submit itemized applications typed on AIA Document G702, Application and Certificate for Payment, together with Continuation Sheets AIA Document G703. 1.3 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT A. Application Form: 1. Fill in required information. 2. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continuation sheets. 3. Execute certification with signature of responsible officer of contracting firm. B. Continuation Sheets: 1. Identify each major item of work by number and title matching those listed in Table of Contents of this Project Manual. 2. Fill in scheduled dollar value for each item. 3. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been performed or products stored. 4. Round off values to nearest dollar. 5. Each Change Order, executed prior to date of submission, at end of continuation sheets. Include Change Order number and brief description. 1.4 SUBSTANTIATING DATA A. Submit,when requested by Architect,to justify line item amounts. B. For products stored off the Project site,in excess of$25,000 in value,identify location of storage site. 1.5 PAYMENT FOR PRODUCTS STORED OFF THE PROJECT SITE A. When delay or added cost to Owner can be avoided by storing products off-site, Owner may make payment to Contractor for said products provided that Contractor shall: 1. Locate storage facilities within 50 miles of project site,or within 50 miles of Architect's office. 2. Make storage facilities available for Architect's visual inspection. 3. Segregate and label stored products for specified project. 4. Assume all risk for loss. 5. Assume responsibility for exceeding product"shelf life". 6. Protect stored products and provide applicable insurance against their damage, discoloration, and theft,listing the Owner and any mortgagee as additional named insured. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 13117 SECTION 01 02 50- 1 Purser 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 7. Submit itemized inventory and Schedule of Values for stored products together with Certificate of Insurance. 8. Submit payment requests to Owner as part of Contractor's regular progress payment request. 9. Reimburse Owner for damages sustained if stored products are not delivered to job site when needed. 10. Submit to Owner, with copy to Architect, a written waiver of lien insuring Owner against claims for unpaid storage costs. 11. Upon receipt of payment from Owner prepare and issue to Owner,with a copy for Architect and any mortgagee,a bill-of-sale for stored products. 1.6 APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. On the day prior to submittal of Application for Payment to Architect, review Application for Payment and related documentation with Owner's Representative and revise as required. B. On or before last calendar day of the month for which payment is due: 1. Submit Application for Payment to Architect and Owner. 2. Beginning with second Application, submit full accounting of all reimbursable costs and fee for work performed through the date of the prior Application for Payment. 3. In addition to above,submit the following if requested by Architect: a. Subcontractors' pay request forms. b. Subcontractors' lien waivers. c. General Contractor's invoice register. d. General Contractor's payroll register. C. On or before the last day of the month following Application submittal: 1. Until Substantial Completion, Owner will pay ninety-five percent (95%) of value of Work performed and of materials stored as defined in General Conditions during the previous month,as estimated by Architect. 2. Payment will be adjusted based on review of the reimbursable costs and fee through the prior month. D. Upon execution of Certificate of Substantial Completion balance due under Contract will be paid, excluding retainage. E. In accordance with terms mutually agreed to by Owner and Contractor,balance due under Contract will be paid after fmal inspection and acceptance by Owner. 1.7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. Submit Applications for Payment to Architect at times stipulated above. B. Number of Application copies required with each submittal: Four(4). C. When Architect finds Application properly completed and correct, he will transmit Certificate for Payment to Owner,with copy to Contractor. END OF SECTION APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 13117 SECTION 01 02 50-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RESPONSIBLE PARTIES A. Immediately following Contract execution, Owner will and Contractor shall identify who, within their respective organizations,will be responsible for executing Change Orders. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Contract Conditions: Sections 00 50 00,00 70 00&00 80 00. B. Applications for Payment: Section 01 02 50. C. Construction Progress Schedules: Section 01 31 00. D. Product Substitutions: Section 01 63 00. E. Contract Closeout: Section 01 70 00. F. Project Record Documents: Section 01 72 00. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Proposal Request: Request from Architect to Contractor for changes to Stipulated Sum and/or Contract Time for proposed changes to the Work. B. Change Order: Written order to the Contractor, executed on a form designated by the Owner, and signed by the Owner and accepted by the Contractor, which amends the Contract Documents as described, and authorizes the Contractor to proceed with change affecting Stipulated Sum and/or Contract Time. C. Architect's Supplementary Instructions: Written order, instruction, or interpretation to Contractor, executed on AIA Form G710 or other similar form designated by Architect, and signed by Architect, which authorizes minor changes in Work not altering Stipulated Sum and/or Contract Time. 1.4 OWNER-OR ARCHITECT-INITIATED CHANGES A. Requests will include: 1. Detailed description of change,including change location and products. 2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications. 3. When appropriate,projected time span for making change,and specific statement as to whether or not overtime work is authorized. 4. When appropriate,specific time period during which requested price will be considered valid. B. Such request is for information only, and is not an instruction or authorization to execute the change or an order to stop Work in progress. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. In lieu of or in addition to Proposal Request, Owner may issue Construction Change Directive for Contractor to proceed with change for subsequent inclusion in future Change Order. B. Construction Change Directive will describe Work changes with attachments of revised change in Stipulated Sum;no change in Contract Time will be authorized by Construction Change Directive. C. Owner will sign and date Construction Change Directive as authorization for Contractor to proceed with changes. D. Contractor shall, if he concurs, sign and date Construction Change Directive to indicate agreement with specified terms. CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 13117 SECTION 01 02 60- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES E. Contractor shall provide final quotation of change in Stipulated Sum within ten(10)working days of the completion of the authorized work. 1.6 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS A. Support quotation of each Unit Price proposal,which has not been previously established,and each lump sum proposal with sufficient substantiating data to allow Architect to evaluate quotation. 1. Submit within ten (10) working days following receipt of Proposal Request or Architect's Supplemental Instruction. 2. With each quotation,submit the following cost and time data: a. Labor required. b. Equipment required. c. Products required. d. Quantity required. e. Purchase source. f. Unit cost. g Taxes,insurance,and bonds. h. Credit for deleted work,similarly documented. i. Overhead and profit. j. Justification for any change in Contract Time. B. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on time-and-material/force account basis with documentation as required for lump-sum proposal,plus the following information. 1. Submit within ten(10)working days of the completion of the quoted work. a. Name of Owner's authorized agent who ordered work,and date of order. b. Dates and times of work performed,and by whom. c. Time records,including summary of hours worked,and hourly rates paid. d. Receipts and invoices for the following: 1) Equipment used,including dates and time of use. 2) Products used,including quantities. 3) Subcontracts. C. Document requests for product substitutions as specified in Section 01630. 1.7 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS A. Architect will prepare each Change Order. B. Change Order will describe Work changes with attachments of any revised Contract Documents, which define details of change. C. Change Order will adjust Stipulated Sum and/or Contract Time. D. Upon agreement between Owner and Contractor, the Work done under any Change Order shall be performed according to a separate Guaranteed Maximum Price for such Work. 1.7 LUMP-SUM CHANGE ORDERS A. Change Order contents will be based on either: CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 13117 SECTION 01 02 60-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1. Agreed Construction Change Directive. 2. Architect's Proposal Request and Contractor's responsive proposal as mutually agreed between Owner and Contractor. B. Owner and Architect will sign and date Change Order as authorization for Contractor to proceed with changes. C. Contractor shall sign and date Change Order to indicate agreement with specified terms. 1.8 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDERS A. Change Order contents will be based on either agreed Construction Change Directive or: 1. Architect's defmition of required changes. 2. Survey of completed work. B. Unit Price amounts shall be either: 1. Those stated in Agreement,if any. 2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor. C. When quantities of items affected by Change Order can be determined prior to start of work: D. Owner and Architect will sign and date Change Order as authorization for Contractor to proceed with changes. E. Contractor shall sign and date Change Order to indicate agreement with specified terms. F. When quantities of Items affected by Change Order cannot be determined prior to start of work: 1. Owner will issue Construction Change Directive directing Contractor to proceed with change on basis of unit prices,and will cite applicable unit prices. 2. Within ten(10)working days of completion of change,Contractor shall submit documentation to establish quantities of units of each item. 3. Architect will determine work cost based upon agreed unit prices and quantities used. 4. Architect will sign and date Change Order to establish change in Stipulated Sum. 5. Owner and Contractor will sign and date Change Order to indicate their agreement with specified terms. 1.9 TIME-AND-MATERIAL AND FORCE-ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDERS A. Owner will issue Construction Change Directive directing Contractor to proceed with changes. B. Within ten(10) working days of completion of change, Contractor shall submit itemized accounting of change with supporting data as specified above in"Documentation of Proposals and Claims". C. Architect will determine allowable cost of such work,as provided in Contract General Conditions. D. Architect will sign and date Change Order to establish change in Stipulated Sum. E. Owner and Contractor will sign and date Change Order to indicate their agreement with specified terms. 1.10 CORRELATION OF CHANGE ORDERS WITH CONTRACTOR'S OTHER SUBMITTALS A. Revise Schedule of Values and subsequent Application for Payment forms to record each change as separate item of work, and to record adjusted Stipulated Sum. B. Revise construction schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time. C. Revise subschedules to show changes for other items of Work affected by changes. CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 13117 SECTION 01 02 60-3 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES D. Upon completion of Change Order Work, record pertinent changes in record documents. END OF SECTION CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 13117 SECTION 01 02 60-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON LISTED ALTERNATES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Listed Alternates. B. Definition: A Listed Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described in Contract Documents. C. Coordination: 1. Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted Listed Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project. 2. Coordinate revisions to related details consistent with scope and extent of Listed Alternates. 3. All costs of related coordination with or modifications to other Work are to be included in each Listed Alternate. D. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each Listed Alternate. Indicate whether Listed Alternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to Listed Alternates. E. Schedule: A "Schedule of Listed Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the Work described under each Listed Alternate. 1. Include as part of each Listed Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Listed Alternate. 2. References to specific drawings for extent of work are provided for the convenience of the Contractor and are not intended to indicate all locations or building elements affected by the Listed Alternate. Contractor is responsible for coordinating the scope of the Listed Alternates among subcontractors and through the entirety of the Contract Documents. PART 2-PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF LISTED ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1: Alternate Packaged Rooftop Units. 1. Provide high-efficiency packaged rooftop units instead of specified ultra high-efficiency units. LISTED ALTERNATES 13117 SECTION 01 03 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON LISTED ALTERNATES 2. Specification Sections affected by this Listed Alternate include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Section 23 05 00"Basic Materials and Methods for Design Build-HVAC." b. Section 26 05 00"Basic Materials and Methods for Design Build-Electrical." END OF SECTION LISTED ALTERNATES 13117 SECTION 01 03 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Voluntary Alternates. B. Related Sections:The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section"Listed Alternates". 2. Division 1 Section"Explanations and Defmitions". 3. Division 1 Section"Materials and Equipment". 4. Division 1 Section"Product Substitutions". C. Definition: 1. A Voluntary Alternate is a system or product voluntarily proposed by Bidders as meeting the aesthetic and performance requirements of a specified system or product,but offering opportunity for measurable Construction Cost savings. 2. Voluntary Alternates represent sums that may be deducted from Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed,or in the products, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described in Contract Documents. 3. Voluntary Alternates do not replace,and are in addition to,bids submitted for the targeted work as described in Contract Documents. 1.2 VOLUNTARY ALTERNATE REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Submittals for each Voluntary Alternate must include all of the materials required in,or show total compliance with all provisions of, the following articles of the specifications sections for the targeted system or product: 1. Division 1 Section"Shop Drawings,Product Data,and Samples". 2. Division 1 Section"Product Substitutions". B. For each Voluntary Alternate, submit all documents, samples, quality assurance, and closeout materials required by sections specifying targeted and related systems and products. These include but are not limited to: 1. Minimum submittals required on Bid Date: a. Indication of compliance with specified performance requirements, including preliminary engineering calculations as may be necessary to indicate compliance. b. Indication of compliance with specified design requirements. c. Product data. d. Engineering calculations by licensed Professional Engineer. e Manufacturer and installer qualification data. f. Product test reports. g. Manufacturer's warranty. h. Indication of compliance with specified or relevant references and industry standards. i. Installed cost. 2. Minimum submittals required after acceptance of Voluntary Alternate: VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES 13117 SECTION 01 03 20- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES a. Indication of compliance with specified performance requirements. b. Indication of compliance with specified design requirements. c. Product data. d Manufacturer and installer qualification data. e. Product test reports. f. Manufacturer's warranty. g. Engineering calculations by Professional Engineer licensed to practice in California. h. Shop drawings. i. Samples for initial selection. j. Certificates. k. Manufacturer's instructions. 1. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions. m. Indication of compliance with specified or relevant quality assurance requirements. n. Project or site condition requirements. o. Scheduling or sequencing requirements. p. Source quality control requirements. q. Closeout submittals. B. Bidders submitting Voluntary Alternates assume full responsibility for demonstrating the acceptability of Voluntary Alternates, including supporting data for engineering, design, substrates, finishes, detailing, installation,maintenance,and cost. C. Attach submittals for each Voluntary Alternate to Bid Form. 1. Include references to Specification Sections containing requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the Work described under each Voluntary Alternate. 2. Include as part of each Voluntary Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Voluntary Alternate. 3. Include references to specific drawings,or attach new drawings,indicating the extent of work. D. Acceptance: Judgment of the acceptability of each Voluntary Alternate rests with the Architect and Owner. Submit additional materials in support of Voluntary Alternates as may be requested by Architect. E. Notification: As soon as possible following the award of the Contract, Contractor will prepare and distribute to each party involved,notification of the status of each Voluntary Alternate. Notification will indicate whether Alternates have been accepted,rejected,or deferred for consideration at a later date,and will include a complete description of negotiated modifications to Voluntary Alternates. F. Coordination: 1. Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted Voluntary Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the Project. a. Contractor is responsible for coordinating the scope of the Voluntary Alternates among subcontractors and through the entirety of the Contract Documents. 2. Coordinate revisions to related details consistent with scope and extent of accepted Voluntary Alternates. 3. All costs of related coordination with or modifications to other Work are to be included in each Voluntary Alternate. VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES 13117 SECTION 01 03 20-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES PART 2-PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3-EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES 13117 SECTION 01 03 20-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Perform all cutting, fitting, and patching, including any attendant excavation and backfill, required to complete Work and to: 1. Make work fit properly together. 2. Integrate with other work. 3. Uncover work for installation of ill-timed work. 4. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. 5. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 6. Provide penetrations through non-structural surfaces for mechanical and electrical work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. For any work not shown on Contract Documents,submit written request for cutting approval to Architect well in advance of any cutting which affects: 1. Work of Owner or any separate Contractor. 2. Structural integrity of any completed or existing work. 3. Waterproof integrity of any weather-exposed or moisture-resistant work. 4. Efficiency,operational life,maintenance,or safety of any completed or existing work. 5. Visual qualities of any sight-exposed work. B. Request shall include: 1. Project identification. 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Effect on Owner's work. 5. Effect on other Contractor's work. 6. Description of proposed work including: a. Extent of cutting,patching,alteration,or excavation. b. Trades who will execute work. c. Products proposed for use. d. Extent of required refmishing. 7. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 8. Cost proposal,when applicable. 9. Written permission of any affected separate Contractor. C. Submit written notice to Architect designating date and time work will be performed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Products specified in relevant technical sections elsewhere in this Project Manual. CUTTING AND PATCHING 13117 SECTION 01 04 50- 1 PERMIT SET 11 08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CUTTING AND PATCHING B. If specified products are no longer available,submit Substitution Request in accordance with Division 01 Section"Product Substitutions". PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Inspect existing conditions and identify work subject to damage or movement caused by proposed cutting and patching. B. After uncovering,inspect conditions affecting performance of Work. C. Report unsatisfactory and questionable conditions to Architect. D. Do not proceed with Work until Architect provides further instructions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Maintain adequate temporary support necessary to assure structural integrity of affected work. B. Protect other portions of project work against damage and discoloration. C. Protect Work exposed by cutting against damage and discoloration. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. Provide proper surfaces for patching and finishing. B. Employ qualified installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for 1. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant surfaces. 2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces. C. Cut concrete and other rigid materials with masonry saw or core drill. Do not overcut corners. D. Restore cut or removed work with new products to provide work complete in accordance with contract documents. Maintain any original fire-resistance rating. E. Where patching occurs,refmish entire surface to provide even fmish to match adjacent work as follows: 1. Continuous Surfaces: refmish to nearest intersection. 2. Assemblies: Refinish entire unit. 3.5 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Including Work of other trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which have been soiled,discolored,or damaged by work of this Section. B. Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner,if directed. END OF SECTION CUTTING AND PATCHING 13117 SECTION 01 04 50-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide Field Engineering required for Project,including the following: 1. Layout Survey Work. 2. Civil,Structural and other Engineering necessary to execute Contractor's construction methods. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Summary of Work: Section 01 01 00. B. Project Record Documents: Section 01 72 00. 1.3 SURVEYOR SELECTION A. Layout Surveyor: State-licensed Land Surveyor B. Engineers: State-licensed in specific service to be performed. 1.4 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A. Existing Points: See Drawings B. Locate prior to starting Site Work,and preserve during construction. C. Make no changes to existing points without Architect's approval. D. Employ State-licensed Land Surveyor to replace any lost,destroyed,or relocated points. 1.5 PROJECT LAYOUT A. Establish at least four(4)construction bench marks on the site referenced to existing control points. B. Record bench mark locations,with horizontal and vertical dimensions. C. Using surveying instruments establish lines and levels for the following: 1. Site improvements,including any paving. 2. Stakes for grading,fill and topsoil placement. 3. Utility slopes and invert elevations. 4. Building foundation,wall,and column locations,floor elevations,and similar elements. 5. Control lines and levels for mechanical and electrical Work. D. Periodically verify layout accuracy. 1.6 RECORDS A. Maintain complete and accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Engineers'names and addresses to Architect. B. When requested,submit documentation to verify engineering accuracy to Architect. C. Submit Certificate signed by Surveyor attesting whether or not work layout conforms with Contract Documents. FIELD ENGINEERING 13117 SECTION O1 05 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON FIELD ENGINEERING 1.8 EQUIPMENT A. Maintain at project site the following: 1. Complete transit. 2. Leveling rod. 3. Plumb bob. 4. 6 ft. and 10 ft.straight edges. 5. 100 ft.long measuring tape. END OF SECTION FIELD ENGINEERING 13117 SECTION 01 05 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions: Section 00 70 00. B. Supplementary Conditions: Section 00 80 00. 1.2 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS&STANDARDS A. For products or workmanship specified by referenced specification or standard, comply with requirements of the specification or standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by governing codes. B. Except where a specific date is specified, the date of the referenced specification or standard is that in effect as of the bid opening date. C. Obtain a copy of all referenced specifications and standards, and maintain at jobsite during the specific work until Substantial Completion of the Project. 1.3 REFERENCED REGULATORY AGENTS A. AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1540 E.Dundee Road,Suite 310 Palatine,IL 60067-8321 B. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capital Street,#249 Washington,D.C. 20001 C. ACI American Concrete Institute 38800 Country Club Drive Farmington Hills,MI 48331 D. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 1 E.Wacker Drive,#3100 Chicago,IL 60601-2001 E. AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1101 17th Street,NW,Suite 1300 Washington,DC 20036 F. ANSI American National Standards Institute 11 W.42nd Street, 13th Floor New York,NY 10036 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS 13117 SECTION 01 09 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS G. ASA American Standards Association (Now known as ANSI: see above) H. ASTM American Society for Testing&Materials 100 Barr Harbor Drive W.Conshohecken,PA 19428-2959 I. AWS American Welding Society 550 N.W.LeJeune Road Knoxville,TN 37932 J. BAAQMD Bay Area Air Quality Management District 939 Ellis Street San Francisco CA 94109 K. CS Commercial Standards of the Commodities Division of the Department of Commerce Washington,D.C. 20006 L. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg,IL 60173 M. FM Factory Mutual Engineering and Research 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike Norwood,MA 02062 N. Fed Spec Federal Specifications of the United States General Services Administration Specifications and Consumer Information Distribution Section(WF SIS) Washington Navy Yard,Bldg. 197 Washington,D.C.20407 O. GS Green Seal 1001 Connecticut Avenue NW,Suite 827 Washington,D.C. 20036-5525 P. MSMA Metal Stud Manufacturers Association Q. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 8 S.Michigan Avenue,Suite 1000 Chicago,IL 60603 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS 13117 SECTION 01 09 00-2 PERMIT SET 1108.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS R. NBFU National Bureau of Fire Underwriters 85 John Street New York,NY 10017 S. NEC National Electric Code published by National Fire Protection Association (See NFPA below) T. NFPA National Fire Protection Association PO Box 9146 One Batterymarch Park Quincy,MA 02269-9101 U. PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 175 West Jackson Blvd. Chicago,IL 60604 V. PS Product Standards of the Commodities Division of the Department of Commerce Washington,D.C. 20203 W. SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District 21865 Copley Drive Diamond Bar CA 91765 X. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 40 24th Street Pittsburgh,PA 15222 Y. UMC Uniform Mechanical Code published by ICBO (See UBC above) Z. UL Underwriters Laboratories 333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook,IL 60062 1.4 TRADE ASSOCIATION REFERENCES A. See specific Specification Sections. END OF SECTION REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS 13117 SECTION 01 09 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON EXPLANATIONS AND DEFINITIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of the Specification language constitutes specific definitions for nominal terms found on the Drawings and in other Contract Documents. Certain terms used throughout the Contract Documents are hereby defined as follows: B. Approve: 1. Where used in conjunction with the Architect's response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports, and claims by the Contractor, the meaning of the term "approved" will be held to the limitations of the Architect's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions. 2. In no case will "approval" by the Architect be interpreted as a release of the Contractor for responsibilities to fulfill requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Directed, Requested, Etc.: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed", "requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved", "required", "accepted", and "permitted" mean "directed by the Architect", etc. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. D. Extra Work: An item of work not provided for in the Contract as awarded but determined by the Architect as essential to the proper completion of the Contract within its intended scope. 1. Extra Work Order: A Change Order concerning the performance of work or furnishing of materials involving extra work. E. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the Project Site,ready for installation. F. General Requirements: The provisions or requirements of the Division 1 sections. The General Requirements apply to the entire work of the Contract and,where so indicated,to other elements of work which are included in the Project. G. Includes, Including: Where terms such as "includes" and"including" are used,they are not intended to indicate an all-inclusive listing of items or elements; they should be read as"includes, but is not limited to,"and"including,but not limited to,". H. Indicated: 1. The term "Indicated" is a cross reference to details, notes or schedules on the drawings, other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and similar means of recording requirements in the Contract Documents. 2. Where terms such as "shown", "noted" and"scheduled" are used, it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate the cross reference, and no limitation of location is intended, except as specifically noted. Installer: The person or entity engaged by the Contractor or his sub-contractor or sub-subcontractor for the performance of a particular unit of work at the project site,including installation,erection,application and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that installers be recognized experts in the work they are engaged to perform. J. Plans: The approved plans, profiles, typical cross-sections, working drawings and supplemental drawings, or exact reproductions thereof, which show the location, character, dimensions and details of the Work to be done or contemplated under the Contract. EXPLANATIONS AND DEFINITIONS 13117 SECTION 01 09 10- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08 13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON EXPLANATIONS AND DEFINITIONS K. Project Site: The space available to the Contractor for the performance of the work,either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing the work as part of the Project. The extent of the project site is shown on the Drawings. L Provide: Except to the extent further defined, the term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. M. Testing Laboratory: An independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the Work, either at the project site or elsewhere, and to report and interpret the results of those inspections or tests. See Section 01410. 1.2 SPECIFICATION EXPLANATIONS A. General: This series of explanations is provided to assist the Contractor to more readily understand the format, language, implied requirements and similar conventions of the content of these Specifications. None of these explanations will be interpreted to modify the substance of the requirements. B. Format Explanations: The format of the principal portions of Specifications can be described as follows, although other portions may not fully comply and no particular significance will be attached to such compliance or non-compliance: 1. Titles: The Specifications are divided into Divisions,sub-divisions and Sections for convenience. The titles of these are not intended to imply a particular meaning or to fully describe the Work of each Division, sub-division or Section, and are not an integral part of the text which specifies the requirements. 2. Each Section of Specification has been sub-divided into 3 "parts" for uniformity and convenience (Part 1 -General,Part 2-Products,and Part 3-Execution). These do not limit the meaning of and are not an integral part of the text which specifies requirements. 3. Imperative language is frequently used. Except as otherwise specified, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. 4. Section Numbering: Used to facilitate cross references in the Contract Documents. The Sections are bound in numerical sequence; however, this sequence is not complete and the Table of Contents of the Specifications must be consulted to determine the numbers and names of specification sections in the Contract Documents. 5. The pages of each Section are numbered independently for each Section. The Section number is shown with the page number at the bottom of each page. 6. Paragraph numbers are in a self-explanatory format, and are purely for the purpose of facilitating subsequent references to specific text, for addenda, purchasing, sub-contracting, modifications, change orders,and similar references. 7. Project identification is recorded at the top of each page to minimize misuse of the Specifications and confusion with other project Specifications. C. Specification Content: Because of the methods by which this Project Specification has been produced, certain conventions of the text and content can be explained as follows: 1. Overlapping and Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more industry standards or sets of requirements is specified, and overlapping of those different standards or requirements establishes two different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, the most stringent requirement (which is generally recognized to be also the most costly) is intended and will be enforced, unless specifically detailed language written into the Contract Documents (not by way of reference to an industry standard)clearly indicates that the less stringent requirement is to be fulfilled. Refer apparently-equal-but-different requirements,and uncertainties as to which of two levels of quality is the more stringent,to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. EXPLANATIONS AND DEFINITIONS 13117 SECTION 01 09 10-2 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON EXPLANATIONS AND DEFINITIONS 2. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance,the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as the minimum for the work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with requirements, the indicated numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. 3. Specialists, Assignments: In certain instances,the specification text requires (or at least implies) that specific work be assigned to certain specialist or expert entities,who must be engaged for the performance or those units of work. These are specified as, and must be recognized as, special requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. These assignments must not be confused with(and are not intended to interfere with)the normal application of regulations,union jurisdictions and similar conventions. One purpose of such assignments is to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of work is to be recognized as the "expert" for the indicated construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, the fmal responsibility for fulfillment of the entire set of requirements remains with the Contractor. 4. Trades, Names: Except as otherwise indicated, the use of trade titles such as "carpentry" in specification text, implies neither that the work must be performed by an accredited or unionized tradesman or the corresponding generic name (such as a carpenter), nor that the specified requirements apply exclusively to work by tradesmen of that corresponding generic name. 5. Abbreviations: a. The Specifications are of abbreviated or streamlined type and frequently include incomplete sentences. Words such as "shall", "shall be", "Contractor shall", and similar mandatory phrases shall be supplied by inference in same manner as they are in a note on Drawings. Contractor shall provide all items listed and perform all operations required,in accordance with Article 1.1.3 of "General Conditions", if and as modified in these Specifications. b. In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all", "each", and "every" and articles such as "the", "a", and "an", but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. c. Actual work abbreviations of a self-explanatory nature have been included in the text. These are generally defined in each Section at the first instance of use for each term so abbreviated. d. Trade associations and general standards are frequently abbreviated;refer to Section 01090 for a general listing of these abbreviations. e. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular wherever applicable and the full context of the requirement so indicates. 1.3 DRAWING EXPLANATIONS A. Wherever a detail is referenced and drawn to describe a specific condition, the same or a similar detail shall be used in identical or similar conditions elsewhere on the Project even if not specifically referenced. B. Where the word "similar" occurs on the Drawings, it shall be interpreted in its general sense and not as meaning identical. All details shall be worked out in relation to their location and their connection with other parts of the Work. C. The figured or noted dimensions on the Drawings shall be used instead of measurements of the Drawings by scale,and shall be strictly complied with. D. No scale measurements of the Drawings shall be used as a dimension for any part of the Work. EXPLANATIONS AND DEFINITIONS 13117 SECTION 01 09 10-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON EXPLANATIONS AND DEFINITIONS 1.5 SPECIFICATION KEYNOTES ON DRAWINGS A. The noting of particular specification sections on the Drawings and Details is intended to indicate the location in the Project Manual of the specific requirements for that portion of the Work. It is not intended to indicate which bidder or subcontractor is required to perform the Work, except as may be otherwise required in the Specifications, to divide the Work among subcontractors or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. In the event of conflict between a keynote number and the referenced verbal description,the verbal description will govern. END OF SECTION EXPLANATIONS AND DEFINITIONS 13117 SECTION O1 09 10-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Contractor will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, weekly progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the Work,and will: 1. Prepare meeting agenda. 2. Distribute notice of each specially called meeting,four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Preside at meetings. 4. Record the minutes;include all significant proceedings and decisions. 5. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within 3 days after each meeting to: a. All meeting participants. b. Architect. c. Owner's Representative. B. Contractor shall make physical arrangements for meetings. C. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of entity each represents. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Construction Schedules: Section 01 31 00. 1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Will be scheduled by Owner's Representative within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: Central site,convenient for all parties,designated by Owner's Representative. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's Representative. 2. Architect and his professional consultants. 3. Contractor's Superintendent,Project Engineer,and Project Manager. 4. Major subcontractors. 5. Major Suppliers. 6. Others as appropriate. D. Minimum Agenda: 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers. b. Projected construction schedules. c. Schedule of Values. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 4. Project coordination. 5. Bidder-design components. 6. Designation of responsible personnel. PROJECT MEETINGS 13117 SECTION 01 20 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PROJECT MEETINGS 7. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions. b. Proposal Requests. c. Submittals. d. Change Orders. e. Applications for Payment. 8. Adequacy of Contract Documents distribution. 9. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 10. Use of premises: a. Office,work,and storage areas. b. Owner's requirements. 11. Construction facilities,controls,and construction aids. 12. Temporary utilities. 13. Safety and first-aid procedures. 14. Hazardous materials. 15. Security procedures. 16. Housekeeping procedures. 1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Weekly meetings shall be held at the jobsite to coordinate the Work, answer questions, and resolve problems. B. The following shall attend: 1. Owner's Representative. 2. Architect and his professional consultants. 3. Contractor's Superintendent,Project Engineer,and Project Manager. C. Others with interest in Project may attend and shall attend when invited. D. Minimum Agenda: 1. Review and approval of previous meeting minutes. 2. Review Work progress since previous meeting. 3. Field observations,problems,conflicts. 4. Problems which impede construction schedule. 5. Review off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 7. Revisions to Construction Schedule. 8. Progress schedule,during succeeding work period. a. 3-week schedule,submitted weekly. 9. Coordination of schedules. 10. Review submittal schedules;expedite as required. 11. Maintenance of quality standards;expedite as required. 12. Pending changes and substitutions. 13. Review proposed changes for: PROJECT MEETINGS 13117 SECTION 01 20 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PROJECT MEETINGS a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other Project Contracts. 14. Other business. 1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. When specified in individual specification section,Contractor will: 1. Convene pre-installation conference at Project site prior to commencing work. 2. Require attendance of those specified. 3. Notify Architect at least four days in advance of meeting date. 4. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and within three days after conference distribute copies of minutes to participants,with two copies to Architect. 5. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, compliance with manufacturer's instructions,and coordination with related work. END OF SECTION ,s PROJECT MEETINGS 13117 SECTION 01 20 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES AND REPORTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Promptly after Contract award, prepare and submit to Architect estimated progress schedules for the Work,with sub-schedules of related activities which are essential to its progress. B. Revise schedules when appropriate. C. If Contractor fails to deliver Schedule on time or to properly update Schedule, Owner may withhold Progress Payment approval until such time as Contractor complies with these requirements. D. If, in Architect's or Owner's opinion, Work progress falls behind approved Schedule, Contractor shall take necessary action to regain lost time. Contractor shall increase Work amount,or number of shifts,or establish overtime operations, or all three, and submit for review Schedule revisions in which progress rate will be regained,all without additional cost to the Owner. E. Contractor's failure to comply with these requirements shall be grounds for determination that Contractor is not prosecuting Work with such diligence as will insure Project completion within specified time. Upon such determination Owner may terminate Contractor's right to proceed with Work, or any separable part thereof,in accordance with General Conditions. F. The Contractor and all sub-contractors, suppliers, and manufacturers shall schedule material deliveries and installations to conform with the Schedule, and provisions to this effect shall be included in all Subcontracts. G. Contractor is responsible for development and execution of the means, methods and timing of performance of the Work. Review and approval of the schedule by the and/or Owner shall not reduce the Contractor's responsibility. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Summary of Work: Section 01 01 00. B. Project Meetings: Section 01 20 00. C. Submittal Schedule: Section 01 34 00. 1.3 SCHEDULES A. Forms: 1. For Contractor's Construction Progress: CPM,network analysis,or approved. 2. For Submittals,etc.: Include in Contractor's Construction Progress Schedule. B. Horizontal time scale: Identify first work day of each week. C. Scale and spacing: Allow space for notations and future revisions. D. Headings: Include separate heading for each specification section title and section number listed in Project Manual Table of Contents. 1.4 SCHEDULE CONTENTS A. Contractor's Construction Progress Schedule: 1. Show complete sequence of construction by activity. a. Show commissioning activities including milestones such as completion of construction checklists and permanent startup of major equipment. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 13117 SECTION 01 31 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 2. Show dates for beginning,and completion,of each major element of Work. 3. Maximum length of scheduled activity: 30 days. B. Submittal Schedule for Shop Drawings,Product Data,and Samples: 1. Show dates for Contractor's submittals. 2. Show dates submittals will be required for Owner-furnished products. 3. Show dates approved submittals will be required from the Architect. C. Products Delivery Schedule: 1. Show delivery dates for products furnished by Owner. 1.5 SCHEDULE REVISIONS A. Indicate progress of each activity up to date of each Schedule submission. B. Show changes occurring since previous Schedule submission. 1. Major changes in scope. 2. Activities modified since previous submission. 3. Revised projections of progress and completion. 4. Other identifiable changes. C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas,anticipated delays,and related impact on Schedule. 2. Corrective action recommended,and expected effect. 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other Prime Contractors. 1.6 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS A. Prepare a daily construction report,recording the following information concerning events at the site. 1. List of subcontractors at the site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at the site. 3. High and low temperatures,general weather conditions. 4. Accidents and unusual events. 5. Meetings and significant decisions. 6. Stoppages,delays,shortages,losses. 7. Meter readings and similar recordings. 8. Emergency procedures. 9. Orders and requests of governing authorities. 10. Change Orders received,implemented. 11. Services connected,disconnected. 12. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. 13. Partial Completions,occupancies. 14. Substantial Completions authorized. 1.7 SUBMISSIONS A. Submit initial Schedules within 15 days after Contract award. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 13117 SECTION 01 31 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 1. Architect will review Schedules and return review copy within 10 days after receipt. 2. If required,resubmit within seven days after return of review copy. B. Submit revised Schedules with each Application for Payment. C. Submit two approved opaque copies of each submission for Architect's permanent use. D. Submit duplicate copies of Daily Construction Reports to Architect and to Owner's Representative at weekly Progress Meeting. 1.8 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of reviewed Schedules to: 1. Jobsite file. 2. Subcontractors. 3. Architect. 4. Owner's Representative. 5. Other concerned parties. B. Instruct recipients to report promptly to Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by projections shown in Schedules. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 13117 SECTION 01 31 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08,13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Extent of Work: Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples only for those items specifically required. The Architect will not be obligated to review Shop Drawings,Product Data, or Samples other than those required by the Contract Documents. B. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Definitions,and additional requirements;see General Conditions,Section 00 70 00. C. Submittal Schedule: Designate in Construction Schedule, and in separate coordinated Schedule, submission dates and dates that reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples will be needed. See Section 01310. 1.2 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Identify Shop Drawing details by reference to drawing sheet, detail, schedule, or room number shown on Contract Drawings. 2. Sheet Size: 8-1/2 x 11 inch minimum,36 x 48 inch maximum. B. Product Data: 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and required clearances. 4. Show wiring and piping diagrams,and controls. 5. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: a. Modify to delete information not applicable to Work. b. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to Work. C. Samples: 1. Size and Quantity: See respective specification sections and Article 1.4 below. 2. Show full range of color,texture and pattern. 3. Deliver to Architect's office,unless otherwise specified. 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review Shop Drawings,Product Data,and Samples prior to submission. B. Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements. 2. Field construction criteria. 3. Catalog numbers and similar data. 4. Conformance with Specifications. C. Comply with Contract Documents. SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 13117 SECTION 01 34 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER • PORTLAND,OREGON SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES D. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of Work. E. Notify Architect in writing, at submission time,of any deviations in submittals from Contract Document requirements. F. Perform no Work or fabrication requiring submittal until Architect approves submittal. 1.4 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved Submittal Schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no Work delay. 1. Provide to Owner's Representative a copy of transmittal letter. B. Number of submittals required: 1. Whenever possible, provide submittals in electronic format instead of the quantity and format listed below. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit two bond copies,one to be retained by Architect and one to be returned to Contractor with an electronic copy. 3. Product Data: Submit two copies,one of which will be retained by Architect. 4. Samples: Submit number stated in respective specification section,or,if not stated,four samples. C. Submittal shall contain: 1. Project title and names of Contractor, supplier, and manufacturer, all visible when drawings are folded. 2. Project identification complete with specification section number. 3. Field measurements,clearly identified as such. 4. Applicable Standards,such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. 5. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 6. Identification of resubmittal revisions. 7. Minimum 4x6 inch space on each page for Contractor's and Architect's stamps. 8. Contractor's stamp, signed and certifying that products, field measurements, field construction criteria,and information submitted has been reviewed and accepted by Contractor as accurate and conforming with Contract Documents. 9. Date for submittal to be reviewed and returned,with indication of priority. 1.5 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMISSIONING A. Equipment and Product Submittals: 1. Provide to the Commissioning Authority a copy of the submittals for equipment to be commissioned. 2. The Commissioning Authority shall review Contractor submittals applicable to systems being commissioned for compliance with commissioning needs, concurrent with review by Architect and/or Engineer. 3. Sequences of Operations Submittals and Controls Submittals will be reviewed for compliance with Owner's project requirements and Contract Documents. B. Data for Commissioning: SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 13117 SECTION 01 34 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 1. Contractor will receive a written request from the Commissioning Authority requesting specific information needed about each piece of commissioned equipment or system. 2. Typically requested information will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up, operating,troubleshooting and maintenance procedures,full details of any owner-contracted tests, fan and pump curves, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty information,including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force clearly identified. In addition, installation and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Commissioning Authority. 3. Although much of this information is contained in the regular O&M manual submittals normally submitted for the Project,submittal of this information will be required prior to the regular formal O&M manual submittals. 1.6 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections or changes in submittals required by Architect and resubmit until approved. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Revise initial drawings or data,and resubmit as specified for initial submittal. 2. Identify any changes made other than those requested by Architect. C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. D. Cost of Additional Review: Costs for third review and subsequent reviews of submittals will be payable by Contractor. 1.7 ARCHITECT'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness. B. Affix signatures and indicate approval,or requirements for resubmittal. C. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution,or resubmission. 1.8 BASE DRAWINGS A. Drawings for use as base drawings are available from the Architect as electronic computer data. 1. Use the Electronic Computer Data Request Form following this Section 01 34 00. 2. Electronic Computer Data will not be released until the party requesting it has signed and dated an Agreement for Receipt of Electronic Computer Data form. B. Drawings in these sets duplicate the Bid Set,without addendum material or subsequent modifications to the Contract. END OF SECTION SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 13117 SECTION 01 34 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 Date: \J2 Project Name/Number: Electronic Data Request Form This form must be completed before electronic data will be released. Company Name: Requested By Company Address Phone Number Email Address Data Description Request 'Provide sheet numbers of all drawings requested.Floor and ceiling plans provided.Details provided upon review.] Format'Describe,e.g.,AutoCAO 2010,Acrobat PDF.) Delivery Method f CD El Electronic Describe,e.g.,email,website It is understood that this documentation is current as of(date) and that the information contained therein may change during the course of the Project. It is agreed that such information is provided for your use for preparation of: TVA is not responsible and will not be held liable for any modifications to this data,whether intentional or unintentional,without TVA's participation.Any copyrights assigned to this electronic data or portions of it shall remain the property of the original copyright holders.TVA will not be liable for any use of this data other than that specifically stated without prior written approval of TVA.You should be aware that electronic transfer of data may be susceptible to the introduction of inexactitudes,anomalies and errors, and that such transfer may not be a perfect duplicate of the original documentation. Upon acceptance of this electronic media provided herewith, you agree to hold harmless and indemnify TVA from all claims arising out of the use of the information provided. Use of this electronic data without signature of this document shall nullify any authorization of such use by TVA. Sign in the space provided below and send a copy of this form to TVA. Requested By: TVA ARCHITECTS,INC. Signature Signature Date Date tva architects,inc. 920 sw sixth avenue suite 1500 porttand, oregon 97204 phone:503 220 0668 www.tvaarchitects.com Robert Thompson.FAIA Marc Labadie,LEED AP Roderick Ashley,AIA John Heili,ALA Montgomery J.Hill,AIA Tim Wybenga,LEED AP PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Applications for Payment: Section 01 02 50. B. Change Order Procedures: Section 01 02 60. 1.2 SCHEDULE FORMAT A. Type Schedule on AIA Document G-703,Application for Payment,Continuation Sheet. 1.3 SCHEDULE HEADINGS A. Identify major work items by number and title matching those listed in table of contents of this Project Manual. B. Coordinate Headings with Construction Progress Schedule. 1.4 CONTENT A. As basis for computing progress payment values,separately list installed value of each of the following: 1. Each major work item 2. Each subcontracted work item. a. For each major subcontract,list products and operations of that subcontract as separate line items. 3. Cash allowances in specified monetary amount of each allowance. 4. Any products to be stored, for which separate payments will be requested. B. Include directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit in component listing. C. Round off values to nearest dollar. D. Sum of values listed shall equal total Contract Sum. 1.5 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submit 3 copies of Schedule within 15 working days following Contract award. B. Form and content shall be acceptable to Owner and Architect. 1.6 SUBSTANTIATING DATA A. When requested by Architect,submit justifying substantiating data and line item amounts in question. END OF SECTION SCHEDULE OF VALUES 13117 SECTION 01 37 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PROJECT SECURITY PART I -GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Establish and maintain project security program to protect Work, stored products, and construction equipment against theft and vandalism. B. Project security program to be in addition to and coordinated with existing Owner's security forces. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Storage and Protection of Products: Section 01 60 00. 1.3 MAINTENANCE OF SECURITY A. Initiate security program promptly after job mobilization. B. Maintain security program throughout construction period, until Owner occupancy or acceptance precludes the need for Contractor security. END OF SECTION PROJECT SECURITY 13117 SECTION 01 54 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.0813 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON TEMPORARY PLANT PROTECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the protection and trimming of existing trees that interfere with,or are affected by, execution of the Work,whether temporary or permanent construction. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 32 91 13-Soil Preparation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to remain during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated. B. Consulting Arborist:A Consulting Arborist registered with the American Society of Consulting Arborists (ASCA). C. Certified Arborist:Certified by The International Society of Arboriculture(ISA). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule from Arborist detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction. C. Qualification Data: For tree service firm. D. Certification: From Arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged. 1. Prior to the start of work the Owner shall employ a Consulting Arborist to evaluate plant materials, including root zones within the construction limits, for evidence of pre-existing rot, disease and damage that might otherwise contribute to or cause a decline in the health of materials designated to remain on site. The report will by written memorandum document the condition of all trees to remain describing the species,size and existing condition prior to construction. 2. Photograph unusual conditions and submit with the required documentation. In the absence of such a report it will be assumed that no such pre-existing conditions exist and replacement and/or mitigation may be required, at the discretion of the Owner's Representative, for such conditions that may arise as a result of construction activities. E. Maintenance Recommendations: From Arborist,for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work. TEMPORARY PLANT PROTECTION 13117 SECTION 01 56 39- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON TEMPORARY PLANT PROTECTION 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed tree protection and trimming work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of tree protection and trimming. B. Tree Pruning Standard: Comply with ANSI A300 (Part 1), "Tree, Shrub, and Other Woody Plant Maintenance--Standard Practices(Pruning)." C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Before tree protection and trimming operations begin, meet with representatives of authorities having jurisdiction, Owner, Owner's Representative, consultants, and other concerned entities to review tree protection and trimming procedures and responsibilities. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Drainage Fill: Selected crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, washed, ASTM D 448, Size 24, with 90 to 100 percent passing a 2-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a 3/4-inch sieve. B. Topsoil:As specified in Section 32 91 13. C. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard,nonwoven,pervious,geotextile fabric of polypropylene,nylon,or polyester fibers. D. Tree Protection Fence: Orange Vinyl construction fencing or other similar fencing at least four feet(4') high and supported at a maximum of ten-foot (10') intervals by metal T-posts or approved methods sufficient enough to keep the fence upright and in place. Wooden stakes and rebar posts are not considered as an approved method sufficient enough to keep the fence up right and in place. E. Organic Mulch: Shredded hardwood,free of deleterious materials. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Temporary Fencing: Install temporary fencing around tree protection zones to protect remaining trees and vegetation from construction damage. Maintain temporary fence and remove when construction is complete. B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations. C. Mulch areas within drip line of trees to remain and other areas indicated. 1. Apply 3-inch average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within of tree trunks. D. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material inside tree protection zones. Do not permit vehicles or foot traffic within tree protection zones;prevent soil compaction over root systems. E. Maintain tree protection zones free of weeds and trash. F. Do not allow fires within tree protection zones. TEMPORARY PLANT PROTECTION 13117 SECTION 01 56 39-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON TEMPORARY PLANT PROTECTION 3.2 EXCAVATION A. Install shoring or other protective support systems to minimize sloping or benching of excavations. B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones,unless otherwise indicated. C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones,hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks and comb soil to expose roots. 1. Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches back from new construction. 2. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil. D. Where utility trenches are required within tree protection zones,tunnel under or around roots by drilling, auger boring,pipe jacking,or digging by hand. 1. Root Pruning: Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. 2. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments;do not break or chop. 3.3 REGRADING A. Grade Lowering: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond tree protection zones. Maintain existing grades within tree protection zones. B. Grade Lowering: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade away from trees as recommended by arborist,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed during grade lowering. 2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots;cut only smaller roots. 3. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments;do not break or chop. C. Minor Fill: Where existing grade is 6 inches or less below elevation of fmish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required fmish elevations. D. Moderate Fill: Where existing grade is more than 6 inches but less than 12 inches below elevation of finish grade,place drainage fill,filter fabric,and topsoil on existing grade as follows: 1. Carefully place drainage fill against tree trunk approximately 2 inches above elevation of finish grade and extend not less than 18 inches from tree trunk on all sides. For balance of area within drip-line perimeter,place drainage fill up to 6 inches below elevation of grade. 2. Place filter fabric with edges overlapping 6 inches minimum. 3. Place fill layer of topsoil to fmish grade. Do not compact drainage fill or topsoil. Hand grade to required finish elevations. 3.4 TREE PRUNING A. Prune trees to remain that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. B. Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by Arborist. TEMPORARY PLANT PROTECTION 13117 SECTION 01 56 39-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON TEMPORARY PLANT PROTECTION C. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300(Part 1) D. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments;do not break or chop. E. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site. 3.5 TREE REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A. Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations within 24 hours. Treat damaged trunks,limbs, and roots according to Arborist's written instructions. B. Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that die or are damaged during construction operations that Arborist determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern. 1. Provide new trees of same size and species as those being replaced; plant and maintain as specified in Section 32 93 00,Planting. 2. Provide new trees of 6-inch caliper size and of a species selected by Owner's Representative when damaged trees more than 6 inches in caliper size,measured 12 inches above grade,are required to be replaced. Plant and maintain new trees as specified in Section 32 93 00,Planting. 3. In lieu of replacement of damaged trees, the Owner's Representative may choose to assess liquidated damages against the Contractor for each tree removed due to damage. Damages shall be assessed at the rate of$45.00 for each deciduous tree and $26 for each evergreen tree per square inch of trunk area according to the formula and standards adopted by the "Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers"in accordance with the evaluation formula set forth in"The Council of Tree and Landscape Evaluation Guide for Plant Appraisers,"Eighth Edition, 1992. C. Aerate surface soil,compacted during construction, 10 feet beyond drip line and no closer than 36 inches to tree trunk. Drill 2-inch-diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches deep at 24 inches o.c. Backfill holes with an equal mix of angered soil and sand. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. Burning is not permitted. B. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material and displaced trees from Owner's property. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. END OF SECTION TEMPORARY PLANT PROTECTION 13117 SECTION 01 56 39-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Materials and Equipment incorporated into Work shall: 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. 2. Comply with size,make,type,and quantity specified,unless otherwise approved in writing. B. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: 1. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges,and to be interchangeable. 2. Two or more items of same kind shall be identical,and by same manufacturer. 3. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. 4. Equipment shall comply with capacity, sizes, and dimensions shown or specified, unless otherwise approved in writing. C. Do not use materials or equipment for any purpose other than that for which designed or specified. D. In performance of the Work, provide materials that are designed and constructed so that when used or installed they will comply with all applicable laws, rules,and regulations, including, without limitation, Occupational Safety and Health Standards promulgated by the U.S.Secretary of Labor. 1. Expenses incurred in complying with these requirements are understood to be included in the Contract Sum. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Summary of Work: Section 01 01 00. B. Shop Drawings,Product Data,and Samples: Section 01 34 00. C. Product Substitutions: Section 01 63 00. D. Cleaning: Section 01 71 00. 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For products specified only by referenced standard,select any product meeting standard. B. For products specified by naming several products,select any one complying with specifications. C. For products specified by naming one or more products and "or approved", select any one specified product or submit request for substitution as specified below. D. For products specified by naming one or more products without restricting the Contractor to use of these products only,select any one specified product or submit request for substitution as specified below. 1.4 INAPPROPRIATE PRODUCTS AND METHODS A. If Contractor believes that any specified product, method, or system is inappropriate for use he shall, if possible, so notify Architect at least 10 (ten)working days prior to bid opening, and if not possible such notice shall be given before performing Work in question. B. If notice of objection is not received within the time limits specified above, then Contractor agrees that the specified products,methods,and systems are appropriate for use on this Project. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 13117 SECTION 01 60 00- 1 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 1.5 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Section 01 63 00. 1.6 QUANTITY OF PRODUCTS REQUIRED A. Whenever in specifications a product is referred to in singular number, such reference shall include as many such products as are shown on Drawings or are required to complete the Work. 1.7 PRODUCTS LIST A. Before Contractor's first request for payment, submit to Architect complete list of major products proposed for use; include proprietary product names,manufacturer's name, and installing subcontractor's name. 1.8 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Perform Work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not omit preparatory or installation procedures required by manufacturer,unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. C. When Contract Documents require Work to comply with manufacturer's instructions, obtain and distribute such instructions to parties performing work including two (2) copies to Architect. Maintain one(1)set at jobsite during installation and until acceptance. D. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in conformance with specified requirements. E. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult Architect for further instructions. F. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. 1.9 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Arrange product deliveries in accord with Contractor's Construction Schedule; coordinate to avoid conflict with work and site conditions. B. Deliver products undamaged, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, and with legible identifying labels intact. C. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with Contract Documents and approved submittals requirements,and assure that products are properly protected and undamaged. 1.10 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Follow manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain product identity labels intact. C. Store products subject to weather-damage in weathertight enclosures. D. Maintain storage room temperature and humidity within ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. E. Maintain reasonable protection against product theft and vandalism. F. Exterior Storage: 1. Store fabricated products above ground, on blocking or skids; prevent product damage and discoloration. 2. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings; provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 13117 SECTION O1 60 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08 13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 3. Store loose granular materials in well-drained area on solid surface to prevent mixing with foreign matter. G. Inspection of Stored Products: 1. Arrange storage to permit easy access for inspection. 2. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained as specified and are free from damage,discoloration,and deterioration. H. Protection after Installation: 1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products against damage and discoloration. Remove covering when no longer needed. END OF SECTION MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 13117 SECTION 01 60 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS PART I -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Architect will be sole judge of acceptability of any proposed substitution. B. Only approved substitutions may be used on Contract Work. C. Each request for substitution approval shall include: 1. Identity of product for which substitution is requested;include specification section and paragraph number. 2. Identity of substitution; include complete product description, drawings, photographs, performance and test data,and any other information necessary for evaluation. 3. Quality comparison of proposed substitution with specified product. 4. Changes in other Work required because of substitution. 5. Effect on Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Cost of proposed substitution compared with specified product. 7. Any required license fees or royalties. 8. Availability of maintenance service. 9. Source of replacement materials. D. No costs involved in or resulting from the incorporation into the work of the substituted product, including costs for changes in other Work,shall be payable by the Owner. E. Provisions of this Section apply to Division 01 Section"Voluntary Alternates". 1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS DURING BIDDING PERIOD A. Substitution Request Requirements: 1. Use CSI Substitution Request Form following this Section 01 63 00. 2. Submit requests to reach Architect at least ten(10)working days prior to Bid Opening. 3. Do not send Substitution Requests directly to Engineers,Owner,or Consultants. B. Request submitted without self-addressed and stamped envelope will not be individually acknowledged. C. Architect will issue Addenda prior to bid opening listing all approved substitutions. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER CONTRACT AWARD A. Approval will be granted only when: 1. Specified product can not be delivered without Project delay;or, 2. Specified product has been discontinued;or, 3. Specified product has been replaced by superior product;or, 4. Specified product can not be guaranteed as specified;or, 5. Specified product will not perform properly;or, 6. Specified product will not fit within designated space;or, 7. Specified product does not comply with governing codes;or, 8. Substitution will be clearly in Owner's interest. B. Owner's Representative will issue Change Order authorizing approved substitutions and revising Contract sum where appropriate. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 13117 SECTION 01 63 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 1.4 CONTRACT COMPLIANCE A. Substitution approval does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for proper execution of the Work and for compliance with other Contract requirements. END OF SECTION PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 13117 SECTION 01 63 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST TO: PROJECT: SPECIFIED ITEM: Section Page Paragraph Description PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of request including identification of applicable data portions. Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents and proposed substitution requires for proper installation. Undersigned certifies following items, unless modified by attachments, are correct: 1. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. 2. Undersigned pays for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by proposed substitution. 3. Proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts available locally or readily obtainable for proposed substitution. Undersigned further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to specified item. Undersigned agrees, if this page is reproduced, terms and conditions for substitutions found in Bidding Documents apply to this proposed substitution. Submitted by: Name (Printed or typed) General Contractor (if after award of Contract) Signature For use by A/E Firm Name Approved _ Approved as noted Address ❑ Not Approved Received too late City, State, Zip By Date Date Tel: Fax: Remarks The Construction Specifications Institute Owner(if after award of Contract) Northwest Region Date Advancement of Construction Technology PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Description of Requirements. 2. Closeout Procedures. 3. Record Document Submittals. 4. Final Cleaning. 5. Operation and Maintenance Data. 6. Warranties and Bonds. 7. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. 8. Prerequisites to Substantial Completion. 9. Prerequisites to Final Acceptance. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. Defmitions: Project Closeout is term used to describe certain collective Project requirements, indicating completion of Work,that shall be fulfilled near end of Contract time in preparation for Final Acceptance and occupancy of Work by Owner, as well as fmal payment to Contractor and normal termination of Contract. B. Special requirements for individual units of work are included in appropriate Specifications Sections in Divisions 2 through 16 of the Project Manual. C. Time of Contract Closeout is directly related to"Substantial Completion",therefore,time of closeout may be either single time period for entire Work or series of time periods for individual elements of Work that have been certified as substantially complete at different dates. This time variation, if any, shall be applicable to other provisions of this Section. 1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed,Work has been inspected,and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review. B. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit fmal Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. D. Architect will perform one Substantial Completion review and one Final Closeout review. Cost of additional Substantial Completion reviews and Final Closeout reviews required due to incomplete elements of Work shall be paid by Contractor,as follows: 1. Owner will compensate Architect for such additional services. 2. Owner will deduct Architect's compensation amount from Contractor's fmal payment as follows: a. Architect's time at$85.00 per hour. b. Others at$55.00 per hour. c. Charges will be made for necessary travel time, auto expense computed at$0.50 per mile, and all other expenses incurred in making inspections. 1.4 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 72 00. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 13117 SECTION 01 70 00- 1 PERMIT SET 1108.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.5 FINAL CLEANING A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 71 00. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 73 00,including Instruction of Owner's personnel. 1.7 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 74 00. 1.8 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual Specifications Sections. B. Deliver,as specific work is completed,to Project Site and place in location as directed by Owner; obtain receipt prior to Substantial Completion. C. Provide spare construction materials in similar fashion as indicated in appropriate Sections of Specifications. 1.9 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. General: Complete following before requesting Architect's inspection for certification of Substantial Completion,either for entire Work or for portions of Work. List known exceptions in request. 1. In progress payment request that coincides with, or is first request following date Substantial Completion is claimed, show either 100% completion for portion of Work claimed as "substantially complete",or list incomplete items,value of incomplete Work,and reason for Work being incomplete. 2. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents. 3. Submit statement showing accounting of changes to Contract Sum, including liquidated damages if required. 4. Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents. 5. Obtain and submit releases allowing the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, fire marshal approval, operating certificates, and similar releases. 6. Deliver tools,spare parts,extra stock of material and similar physical items to Owner. 7. Complete instruction of Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities and services from Project Site,along with construction tools and facilities mock-ups and similar elements. 8. Complete final cleanup requirements,including touch-up painting of blemished surfaces. 9. Complete major punchlist items. 10. Contractor shall submit copy of Contractor's Punchlist to Architect,clearly stating that building is ready for review with exception of items noted in Contractor's Punchlist. B. Review Procedure: Upon receipt of Contractor's request for review, Architect will either proceed with review or advise Contractor of unfulfilled prerequisites. C. Following initial review,Architect will either prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion or will advise Contractor of Work which must be performed before Certificate will be issued. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 13117 SECTION 01 70 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONTRACT CLOSEOUT D. Architect will repeat review when requested and when assured that Work has been substantially completed. E. Contractor shall pay costs of repeat reviews. See paragraph 1.3,D. F. Results of completed review will form initial"punchlist" for final acceptance. 1.10 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. General: Complete following before requesting Architect's final review for certification of final acceptance and final payment as required by General Conditions. List known exceptions, if any, in request. 1. Submit final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Included certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 2. Submit updated final statement,accounting for final additional changes to Contract Sum. 3. Submit certified copy of Architect's final punchlist of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and has been reviewed and dated by Architect. 4. Submit consent of surety. 5. Submit evidence of fmal,continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 6. Complete functional testing on all commissioned systems and assemblies with outstanding issues identified and a schedule for their completion and retesting submitted to and approved by the Owner. Completion of seasonal testing, near-warranty end activities and verification of later controls training sessions shall be excepted. 7. Complete training of Owner personnel according to the training plan with a schedule for the outstanding training submitted to and approved by the Owner. 8. All O&M manuals shall have been approved by the Owner, Architect and Commissioning Authority and fmal copies submitted to the Owner,including as-built documentation. 9. Submit record documents per Division 01 Section"Project Record Documents". B. Re-review Procedure: Architect will re-review Work upon receipt of Contractor's notice that Work has not been completed, including punchlist items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances that are acceptable to Architect. C. Upon completion of re-review, Architect will either prepare Certificate of Final Acceptance, or will advise Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled, but are required for Final Acceptance. If necessary,re-review procedure will be repeated. D. Submit fmal statement of costs for additional reviews per 1.3 D. Coordinate with Architect. E. Architect will prepare and issue final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum not previously made by Change Orders. END OF SECTION CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 13117 SECTION 01 70 00-3 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CLEANING AND TRASH REMOVAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1. EXTENT OF WORK A. Execute cleaning and trash removal during Work progress and at completion of Work as required by Contract Conditions,and as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Cleaning specific products or work: see respective Specification Sections. 1.3 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with governing codes,regulations,ordinances,and anti-pollution requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Follow cleaning material and surface manufacturers'instructions. B. Use only those recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned. C. Use only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. D. Use only Green Seal GS-37 approved cleaning materials. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Follow cleaning material and surface manufacturers'instructions. 3.2. DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Periodically clean to maintain Work, site, and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste, rubbish,and windblown debris,resulting from construction operations. B. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste,debris,and rubbish. C. Periodically remove waste,debris,and rubbish,legally dispose of away from Project site. 3.3 DUST CONTROL A. Clean surfaces prior to painting,and continue cleaning as needed until painting is complete. B. Schedule cleaning so that resultant dust and contaminants will not fall on wet or newly-coated surfaces. 3.4 FINAL CLEANING A. Remove waste,debris and surplus material from project site. B. Clean grounds as follows: 1. Paved surfaces: Remove stains,spills,and foreign substances,and hose-clean. 2. Other surfaces: Rake clean. CLEANING AND TRASH REMOVAL 13117 SECTION 01 71 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CLEANING AND TRASH REMOVAL C. In addition to debris removal and cleaning specified in other Sections,clean exposed-to-view interior and exterior surfaces. D. Employ skilled workers to perform cleaning. E. Remove any temporary protection and labels not required to remain. F. From sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces, remove grease, mastic, adhesive, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints,labels,and other foreign matter. G. Clean lighting fixtures and lamps. H. Maintain structure and components clean until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION CLEANING AND TRASH REMOVAL 13117 SECTION 01 71 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Maintain at Project site for Owner,one(1)record copy of: 1. Contract Drawings and Project Manual. 2. Addenda. 3. Change Orders and other Contract modifications. 4. Field orders and other written instructions. 5. Approved shop drawings,product data,and samples. 6. Field test reports. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Contract Conditions: Sections 00 70 00 and 00 80 00. B. Submittals: Section 01 34 00. C. Operating and Maintenance Data: Section 01 73 00. D. Contract Closeout: Section 01 70 00. 1.3 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. B. Provide files,shelving and cabinets necessary to safely and securely store documents and samples. C. Maintain documents clean,dry,legible,and in good order. D. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. E. Make documents available at all times for Architect's inspections. 1.4 DRAFTSMAN'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Drafting must be accurate and legible. B. If Architect deems submitted drafting to be unacceptable,redraft until acceptable at no additional cost to Owner. 1.5 MARKING DEVICES A. Waterproof,felt-tip pens. B. Color code,unless otherwise directed or approved. 1. Red: Document changes. 2. Green: Work deleted. 3. Blue: Dimensional and other notations. 1.6 REQUIRED DRAWINGS A. Maintain one (1) black-line or blue-line print of Contract drawings as work-set; using marking devices specified above to record all Contract changes. B. Prior to submittal, revise CADD files,provided by Owner,to include recorded Contract changes; submit revised CADD files and reproducible.pdf files on disc format,provided by Contractor. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 13117 SECTION 01 72 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1. Changes made to the Drawings pursuant to changes in the Work which are not Owner-initiated, including all changes made for the coordination of Contractor or subcontractor work or for the convenience of Contractor or a subcontractor, will be made on CADD disks at Contractor's or subcontractor's cost. This includes, without limitation, changes to the Work of site utilities and Divisions 15 and 16. C. Contractor may retain work-set for his records. D. Drawings for use as base drawings are available from the Architect as electronic computer data. 1. Use the Electronic Computer Data Request Form following Section 01 34 00. 2. Electronic Computer Data will not be released until the party requesting it has signed and dated an Agreement for Receipt of Electronic Computer Data form. E. Drawings in these sets duplicate the Bid Set,without addendum material or subsequent modifications to the Contract. 1.7 RECORDING A. Label each document PROJECT RECORD in neat,large,printed letters. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Project records will be reviewed on a monthly basis with Contractor's Application for Payment. C. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. D. Legibly mark drawings to record the following actual construction: 1. Depth of foundation elements in relation to ground floor elevation. 2. Horizontal and vertical locations of the underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvement. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances, including backing materials, concealed in construction,referenced to visible and accessible features of structure. 4. Field changes of dimensions and details. 5. Changes made by Change Order, Job Instruction or Architect's Supplemental Instruction with reference to document number. 6. Details not shown on original Contract drawings. E. Legibly mark specifications and any addenda to record the following: 1. Manufacturer,trade name,catalog number,and supplier of each product actually installed. 2. Changes made by change order,job instruction,or Architect's supplemental instruction. 3. Note related record drawings and product data,where applicable. 1.8 SUBMITTAL A. Review status of record documents will be required by Architect at 75 percent Project completion. 1. Contractor will provide(1)one set of current dated record documents to be reviewed by Architect. 2. Architect will review documents for accuracy and information quality to date. 3. Architect will return documents to Contractor with comments and or corrections as required. B. Fifteen days prior to Final Inspection,deliver record documents to Architect for forwarding to Owner. C. At Contract close-out Contractor shall review with Owner's Representative and Architect which submitted samples are to be submitted to Owner for record purposes. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 13117 SECTION 01 72 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS D. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate,containing: 1. Project title. 2. Date. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. Title and number of each record document. 5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative. END OF SECTION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 13117 SECTION 01 72 00-3 PERMIT SET 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under Contract. B. Prepare as specified herein and in other Specification Sections. C. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Voluntary Alternates: Section 01 03 20. B. Submittals: Section 01 34 00. C. Contract Closeout: Section 01 70 00. D. Project Record Documents: Section 01 72 00. E. Warranties&Bonds: Section 01 74 00. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Data preparation shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 2. Completely familiar with requirements of this Section. 3. Sufficiently skilled as technical writer to communicate essential data. 4. Sufficiently skilled as draftsmen to competently prepare required drawings. 1.4 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in form of instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. B. Format: 1. Size: 8-1/2 x 11 inches 2. Paper for Typing: 20 lb.minimum,white 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typed. 4. Drawings: a. Reinforce edges against tear-out b. Bind-in with text c. Fold larger drawings to match size of text pages. 5. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product. 6. Identify each fly-leaf with labeled tabs. 7. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title"Operating and Maintenance Instruction", and list the following: a. Project Title b. Identity of general subject matter contained in manual. C. Electronic O&M Manuals: In addition to binders,provide information for Divisions 11, 14, 15 and 16 in electronic format as follows: OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 13117 SECTION 01 73 00- 1 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1. Electronic O&M manuals shall consist of all hard-copy O&M manual data scanned in.pdf format, using quality scanning equipment at 200 dpi black and white in manageable file sizes less than 12Mb. 2. The electronic manual shall have either a detailed folder and file structure electronically on the CD or DVD with long descriptive file names of the equipment for clear access,OR a similar type of table of contents shall be provided in a Word or Excel file with long descriptive name entries that are hyperlinked to the associated file on the CD or DVD. 3. Submit one CD/DVD containing the contents of each hard copy O&M binder, provided in a pocket in the binder. Each CD/DVD shall be clearly labeled with printed labels indicating what equipment is contained on the media. 4. Electronic files provided by the vendor are acceptable, if they are provided on the O&M Manual CD and comply with specified submittal requirements. 5. The hard copy binder of the O&M manual containing multiple pieces of equipment shall not all be scanned into one file. A .pdf file will contain only one piece of equipment for larger equipment and may include multiple components associated with a piece of equipment, if the Table of Contents listing indicates additional data is included. For smaller equipment (exhaust fans, terminal units,etc.),multiple pieces of similar equipment may be contained in a single file. 6. Product data shall be limited to work of this Project. A vendor's product line of other models and equipment shall not be included. 7. Electronic manuals are to be submitted after hard copy versions have been approved. 8. Before preparing electronic manuals, submit for review and approval a sample electronic manual for one Division illustrating the format and functionality of the fmal product. 1.5 BINDERS A. Commercial quality,3-ring type with durable and cleanable plastic covers. B. When multiple binders are used,correlate data into related consistent groupings. 1.6 MANUAL CONTENT,GENERAL A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume,arranged in systematic order. B. List the following: 1. Contractor,name of responsible principal,address and telephone number. 2. Each product,including name,address and telephone number of: a. Subcontractor or installer. b. Recommended maintenance contractor. c. Local source of replacement parts. 3. Product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. C. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation c. Delete references to inapplicable data. D. Drawings: OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 13117 SECTION 01 73 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1. Supplement product data with drawings where necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relation of component parts. b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Do not use Project record documents as maintenance drawings. E. Written Text: 1. Provide where necessary to supplement product data drawings. 2. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 3. Provide logical sequence of instruction for each procedure. F. Warranties,Bonds and Maintenance Contracts: 1. Provide copy of each. 2. Include the following: a. Proper procedures in event of failure. b. Instances which might affect validity of warranties,bonds or Contracts. 1.7 MANUAL FOR ARCHITECTURAL MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Inched the following manufacturer's data for all products and fmishes: 1. Catalog number,size and composition. 2. Color and texture designations. 3. Required recording information. 4. Recommended cleaning materials and methods. 5. Cautions against detrimental cleaning materials and methods. 6. Recommended cleaning and maintenance schedule. 1.8 MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Include the following manufacturer's data: 1. Description of unit and component parts including: a. Function,normal operating characteristics and limiting conditons. b. Performance curve,engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replacement parts. 2. Panel board circuit directories indicating: a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications,if any. 3. As-installed wiring color code legend,if any. 4. Operating procedures,including: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 13117 SECTION 01 73 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA b. Trouble-shooting guide. c. Special operating instructions. 5. Maintenance procedures including: a. Routine operations. b. Trouble-shooting guide. c. Disassembly,repair and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. Parts list,including current prices and recommended spare parts to be maintained in storage. B. Submit specified information for products requiring Owner's operation or maintenance. 1.9 ADDITIONAL DATA A. Prepare and include the following: 1. Additional data when need becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. 2. Additional data specified in other sections of Specifications to be included. 1.10 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Preliminary Draft: 1. Submit two(2)copies of proposed format. 2. Owner's Representative and Architect will review and return one(1)copy with comments. B. Final Submittal: 1. Submit,in final form,one(1)copy of complete data 15 days prior to final inspection. 2. Copy will be returned with comments. 3. Submit four(4)copies in approved final form,within 10 days of final inspection. END OF SECTION OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 13117 SECTION 01 73 00-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Warranty of Construction: Sections 00 70 00&00 80 00. B. Contract Closeout: Section 01 70 00. C. Operating&Maintenance Data: Section 01 73 00. D. Warranties&Bonds required for specific products: see respective Specification Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers, and Subcontractors, within ten days after completion of applicable item or work. 1. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial Completion is determined. 2. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission,submit documents within ten days after acceptance. B. Verify that documents are in proper form,contain full information,and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Number of original signed copies required: Provide one copy for each volume of Owner's Maintenance Manual as specified in Section 01730. F. Table of Contents: Neatly type in orderly sequence. G. Provide complete information for each item: 1. Product or work item. 2. Firm,with name of principal,address,and telephone number. 3. Beginning date of warranty,bond,or service and maintenance contract. 4. Duration of warranty,bond,or service and maintenance contract. 5. Provide the following information for Owner's personnel: a. Procedure in case of failure or malfunction. b. Instances which affect warranty or bond validity. 6. Contractor,name of responsible principal,address,and telephone number. 1.4 SUBMITTAL FORM A. Punch sheets for standard 3-ring binder. B. Size: 8-1/2 x 11 inches. C. Fold larger sheets to fit into binder. D. Cover: Identify each Packet with typed or printed title"Warranties and Bonds". WARRANTIES AND BONDS 13117 SECTION 01 74 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON WARRANTIES AND BONDS E. List the following: 1. Title of Project. 2. Name of Contractor. F. Bind into Owner's Maintenance Manuals specified in Section 01 73 00. END OF SECTION WARRANTIES AND BONDS 13117 SECTION 01 74 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. B. This Section describes demolition and construction waste management and recycling goals and includes administrative and procedural requirements for the development and execution of a construction waste management plan. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 02 Section"Site Demolition"requirements for salvage and recycling of demolition debris. 1.2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS A. The Owner has established that this Project shall generate the least amount of waste possible and that processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error,poor planning,breakage, mishandling,contamination,or other factors shall be employed. B. Of the inevitable waste that is generated,as many of the waste materials as economically feasible shall be reused,salvaged,or recycled. Waste disposal in landfills shall be minimized. C. Diversion Goal:A minimum 95%of total project waste shall be diverted from the landfill. D. With regard to these goals the Contractor shall develop,for the Owner and Architect's review,a Waste Management Plan for this Project. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Construction Waste Management Plan. B. Periodic and final summary report of waste materials recycled,salvaged and landfilled. C. Weight tickets for all waste materials removed from the site during demolition and construction. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. Draft Waste Management Plan: Prior to the Pre-Construction Conference,or prior to any waste removal, whichever occurs sooner,the Contractor shall meet with the Owner's designated representative(s)and Architect to discuss preparation of a Draft Waste Management Plan. The Draft Plan shall contain the following: 1. Analysis of the proposed jobsite waste to be generated. Include the types of material to be generated and estimated quantity of each material(in tons). 2. Landfill options:Estimated cost of disposing of all project waste in transfer station(s)/landfill(s), name of transfer station(s)/landfill(s)where Project waste would normally be disposed of and tipping fees. Estimated cost of transportation and other relevant costs and fees. 3. Alternatives to Landfilling: A list of each material proposed to be salvaged or recycled during the course of the Project.The list of these materials is to include,at a minimum,the following materials: a. Concrete b. Asphalt c. Bricks d. Concrete Masonry Units(CMU) e. Landclearing debris f. (Landclearing debris shall not contribute to Diversion Goal achievement) g. Clean dimensional wood h. Plywood,OSB,and particle board i. Cardboard j. Paper CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 13117 SECTION 01 74 19- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT k. Metals 1. Gypsum Wallboard m. Carpet n. Paint o. Plastic p. Glass q. Ridged foam insulation r. Beverage Containers 4. Material Handling Procedures: A description of the means by which any waste materials identified in item(3)above will be protected from contamination,and a description of the means to be employed in recycling the above materials consistent with requirements for acceptance by designated facilities. 5. Commingled recycling rather than on-site separation requires a summary of either the exact weight or volume of commingled waste or average diversion rates of the recycling facility. Note that visual inspection is not an acceptable form of facility measurement. 6. Transportation: A description of the means of transportation of the recyclable materials(whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers,or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler and removed from the site)and destination of materials. The final destination must be approved by Owner designated representative(s). 7. Source Reduction: List processes that minimize waste such as working with suppliers to take back or buy back substandard,rejected or unused items and to deliver supplies using returnable pallets and containers. Also include procedures to minimize breakage,mishandling,contamination,and other factors that reduce job site waste. 8. Meetings: A description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste management. Contractor shall conduct Construction Waste Management meetings. Meetings shall include subcontractors affected by the Waste Management Plan as well as Owner designated representative(s). At a minimum,waste management goals and issues shall be discussed at the following meetings: pre-bid meeting,pre-construction meeting,and regularly scheduled job-site meetings. 9. Indicate any instance where compliance with requirements of this specification does not appear to be possible and request resolution from the Owner and Architect. B. Waste Management Plan Review Meeting: Once the Owner and Architect have reviewed the Draft Waste Management Plan and prior to any waste removal at the site,schedule and conduct a follow-up meeting agreed upon during the meeting identified in para. 1.4 A above. The purpose of the meeting is to review the Draft Waste Management Plan and discuss procedures,schedules and specific requirements for waste materials recycling and disposal. Discuss coordination and interface between the Contractor and other construction activities.Identify and resolve potential compliance problems with requirements. Record minutes of the meeting,identifying all conclusions reached and matters requiring further resolution. 1. Attendees:The Contractor and related Contractor personnel associated with the work of this section,including personnel to be in charge of the waste management program,Architect,Owner and such additional personnel as the Architect or Owner deem appropriate. C. Final Construction Waste Management Plan:Make any revisions to the Draft Waste Management Plan agreed upon during the Waste Management Plan Review Meeting and incorporate resolutions agreed to be made subsequent to the meeting. Submit the revised plan to the Owner and Architect for approval within 10 calendar days of the meeting. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 13117 SECTION 01 74 19-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 2 -PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 IMPLEMENTATION OF CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. Manager: The Contractor shall designate an on-site party(or parties)responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan for the Project. B. Instruction: The Contractor shall provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation,handling,and recycling,salvage,reuse,and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the Project. C. Separation Facilities: The Contractor shall lay out and label a specific area to facilitate separation of materials for potential recycling,salvage,reuse,and return. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. D. Hazardous Waste: Hazardous wastes shall be separated,stored,and disposed of according to local regulations. E. Application for Progress Payments: The Contractor shall submit with each Application for Progress Payment a Summary of Waste Generated by the Project. Failure to submit this information shall render the Application for Payment incomplete and shall delay Progress Payment. The Summary shall be submitted on a form acceptable to the Owner and shall contain the following information: 1. The amount of waste(in tons) landfilled from the Project,the identity of the transfer station/landfill,the total amount of tipping fees paid at the landfill,the transportation cost,and the total disposal cost. Include manifests,weight tickets,receipts,and invoices. 2. For each material recycled,reused,or salvaged from the Project,the amount(in tons),the date removed from the jobsite,the receiving party,the transportation cost,the amount of any money paid or received for the recycled or salvaged material,and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. Attach manifests,weight tickets,receipts,and invoices. F. At the end of the Project the Contractor shall submit a Final Waste Management Report. The Report shall be submitted on a form acceptable to the Owner and shall contain the following information: 1. The total amount of waste landfilled from the Project,the identity of the transfer station/landfill, the total amount of tipping fees paid at the landfill,the transportation cost,and the total disposal cost. 2. The total amount(in tons)of each material recycled,reused,or salvaged from the Project,the receiving party,and net cost savings or additional costs resulting from separating and recycling (versus landfilling)each material. The total amount of all materials recycled in tons and the total net cost savings or additional costs. 3. The total percentage of material recycled in tons. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 13117 SECTION 01 74 19-3 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section requires the selective removal and subsequent reuse or offsite disposal of the following: 1. Portions of existing building indicated on drawings and as required to accommodate new construction. 2. Removal and protection of existing fixtures,materials,and equipment items indicated"salvage"or "deliver to Owner". B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Remodeling construction work and patching are included within the respective sections of specifications,including removal of materials for reuse and incorporation into remodeling or new construction. 2. Relocation of pipes,conduits,ducts,and other mechanical and electrical work is specified in other Divisions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections. B. Schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for selective demolition work to Owner's Representative for review prior to start of work. Include coordination for shutoff,capping,and continuation of utility services as required,together with details for dust and noise control protection. 1. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations. 2. Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of portions of existing building and with Owner's partial occupancy of completed new work. C. Photographs of existing conditions of structure surfaces,equipment,and adjacent improvements that might be misconstrued as damage related to removal operations. File with Owner's Representative prior to start of work. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Occupancy: Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition work in manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner's normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of demolition activities that will affect Owner's normal operations. B. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 13117 SECTION 02 41 19- 1 PERMIT SEC 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, minor variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work. C. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. 1. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. D. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work. 1. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's personnel and general public to occupied portions of building. Maintain required exit paths at both interior and exterior of building. 2. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities or work to remain. 3. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations. 4. Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary. 5. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building. 66. Remove protections at completion of work. E. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work. F. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal to ensure minimum interference with roads,streets,parking areas,walks,and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close,block,or otherwise obstruct streets,walks,or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner or from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. G. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces,verify condition of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. H. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities,except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction and by Owner's Representative. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities and to Owner's Representative. 2. Maintain fire protection services during selective demolition operations. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling,temporary enclosures,and other methods to limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice,flooding, and pollution. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 13117 SECTION 02 41 19-2 PERMIT SET 11 08 13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 2-PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: Provide interior and exterior shoring,bracing,or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. 1. Cease operations and notify Owner's Representative immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. 2. Cover and protect furniture,equipment,and fixtures from soilage or damage when demolition work is performed in areas where such items have not been removed. 3. Erect and maintain dust-proof partitions and closures as required to prevent spread of dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building. a. Where selective demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of the building, construct dust-proof partitions of minimum 3 1/2-inch studs,5/8-inch drywall(joints taped) on occupied side, 1/2-inch fire-retardant plywood on demolition side. Fill partition cavity with sound-deadening insulation. b. Provide weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work. 3.2 DEMOLITION A. General: Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations. 1. Demolish concrete in small sections. Cut concrete at junctures with construction to remain using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools;do not use power-driven impact tools. 2. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. 3. For interior slabs on grade,use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw where possible. B. Salvaged Items: 1. Sort and organize salvaged materials as they are removed from the structure. 2. Pack,crate or band materials to keep them contained and organized. 3. Store items in a secure and weather protected area until removed from the site or transferred to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's long-term storage area designated by Owner if Owner is to maintain ownership of salvaged materials. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage if Owner is to maintain ownership of salvaged materials. C. If unanticipated mechanical,electrical,or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered,investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Owner's Representative in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's Representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 13117 SECTION 02 41 19-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 3.3 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove from building site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Transport and legally dispose off site. 1. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations,laws,and ordinances concerning removal,handling,and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. 2. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site. 3.4 CLEANUP AND REPAIR A. General: Upon completion of demolition work,remove tools,equipment,and demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean. 1. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. END OF SECTION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 13117 SECTION 02 41 19-4 PERMIT SEC 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures,finishes,and cleaning. B. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following: 1. New concrete foundations. 2. New concrete shear wall. 3. New concrete slab on grade. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials,integral color and sealer,and others as requested by Architect. B. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings through concrete structures. C. Shop drawings for formwork indicating fabrication and erection of forms for all concrete surfaces scheduled to be exposed to view. Show form construction including panel layout and jointing,pour-back joints, special form joints or reveals, location and pattern of form tie placement, and other items that affect exposed concrete visually. D. Reproduction of Contract Documents is unacceptable. Do not use the same sheet numbers nor section labels as used on Contract Documents. References to Contract Documents shall not be substituted for complete shop drawings. E. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test. F. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements. G. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. American Concrete Institute(ACI)301,"Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 2. ACI 318-08,"Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI),"Manual of Standard Practice." B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 01 Section"Project Meetings"and the following: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 13117 SECTION 03 30 00- 1 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. At least 15 days prior to submitting design mixes, conduct a meeting to review detailed requirements for preparing concrete design mixes and to determine procedures for satisfactory concrete operations. a. Review requirements for submittals, status of coordinating work, and availability of materials. b. Review coordination of embed layouts, tolerances for installation of cast-in-place concrete and of products attaching to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. c. Establish preliminary work progress schedule and procedures for materials inspection, testing,and certifications. d. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend conference,including,but not limited to,the following: 1) Contractor's superintendent. 2) Agency responsible for concrete design mixes. 3) Agency responsible for field quality control. 4) Ready-mix concrete producer. 5) Concrete subcontractor. 6) Primary admixture manufacturers. 7) Subcontractors providing products requiring embeds in or structural attachment to cast-in-place concrete, including structural steel, cold-formed metal framing, and wall and soffit panel systems. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. C. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to exposed surface. 1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1-inch diameter in concrete surface. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615,Grade 60(ASTM A 615M Grade 400),deformed. B. Reinforcing Steel to be Welded: ASTM A706,Grade 60(ASTM A 706M Grade 400),deformed. C. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82,plain,cold-drawn steel. D. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185,welded steel wire fabric. E. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire-bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 13117 SECTION 03 30 00-2 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618,Type C or Type F. B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 1. For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling. 2. Maximum size:3/4 inch and not more than one-fifty of narrowest space between reinforcing bars. 3. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but that special tests or actual service have shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to Architect. C. Water: Potable. D. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330. E. Admixtures, General: Provide admixtures for concrete that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260,certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. G. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type F or Type G. H. Water-Reducing,Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type E. I. Water-Reducing,Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type D. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Reglets: Where resilient or elastomeric sheet flashing or bituminous membranes are terminated in reglets, provide reglets of not less than 0.0217 inch thick(26-gage) galvanized sheet steel. Fill reglet or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. B. Sand Cushion: Clean,manufactured or natural sand. C. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182,Class 2. D. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following,complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap. E. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Water-based, non-yellowing (UV stable) acrylic solids cure-seal-hardening compound. F. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. G. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base. H. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material"Type,""Grade,"and"Class"to suit project requirements. I. Control Joint Sealant: Two-component,moisture-insensitive, flexible,self-leveling epoxy resin. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 13117 SECTION 03 30 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing. B. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 20 percent of cement content by weight. C. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 10 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Architect. D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the properties indicated on drawings and schedules: E. Water-Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum water-cement (W/C) ratios as follows,unless noted otherwise on structural drawings: 1. Subjected to freezing and thawing: W/C 0.42. 2. Subjected to deicers/watertight: W/C 0.40. 3. Subjected to brackish water,salt spray,or deicers: W/C 0.40. F. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps,slabs,and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches(75 mm). 2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 3 inch (76 mm) and not more than 5 inches (127 mm). 3. Concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not more than 10 inches(254 mm)after adding admixture to site-verified 3-5 inch(76- 127 mm)slump concrete. 4. Other Concrete: Not more than 5 inches(127 mm). G. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in work. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability. B. Use nonchloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F (10 deg C). C. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1 percent within following limits: 1. Concrete basement walls, exterior walls and other vertical surfaces exposed to the weather, floor slab,and all concrete placed using Cold Weather Placement under ACI 306: 5 percent air. 2. Other concrete (not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure) or to receive a surface hardener: None. D. Use admixtures for water reduction and set control in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. E. Verify compatibility of air-entraining admixture,if used,with integral color. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 13117 SECTION 03 30 00-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 1 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Job-Site Mixing: Mix materials for concrete in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. For mixers of one cu. yd. or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer,before any part of batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than one cu. yd., increase minimum 1-1/2 minutes of mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd. or fraction thereof. B. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating project identification name and number,date,mix type,mix time,quantity,and amount of water introduced. C. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94,and as specified. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F(30 deg C)and 90 deg F(32 deg C),reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes,and when air temperature is above 90 deg F(32 deg C),reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and vapor retarders with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. B. Provide blockouts as required for installation of mechanical and electrical equipment. 3.2 FORMS A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits,unless more stringent tolerances are noted: 1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view. 2. Provide Class B tolerances for other concrete surfaces. 3. Provide Class C tolerances for concrete footings. B. Construct forms to sizes,shapes,lines,and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment,location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers,blocking, screeds,bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking. C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways,reglets,recesses,and the like for easy removal. 1. Provide external bracing instead of snap ties at exposed concrete walls. D. Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 13117 SECTION 03 30 00-5 PERM F SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete,as required,to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. H. Form release agent shall not be allowed to collect in the forms or come in contact with reinforcing steel or embedded items. I. Form release agent shall not be used where concrete surfaces are to receive special coating. Soak contact surfaces of untreated forms with clean water and wet surfaces with water immediately prior to placing concrete. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified. 1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete. 2. Coordinate locations of floor track at side-coiling doors, electrical floor boxes, floor sinks and other items scheduled to be cast in to concrete slabs. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs,runners,bolsters,spacers,and hangers,as approved by Architect. D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange, space,and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete,not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.4 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of the structure,as acceptable to Architect. B. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints or drill and epoxy-set dowelled rebar, unless indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements. C. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. D. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of Work. Field- fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's printed instructions. E. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points of contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations,as indicated unless noted otherwise on structural drawings. 1. Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in Division 07 Sections of these specifications. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 13117 SECTION 03 30 00-6 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE F. Contraction(Control)Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Construct contraction joints in slabs-on-ground to form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch wide by 1/4 slab depth. 1. Contraction joints in unexposed floor slabs may be formed by saw cuts as soon as possible after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate. 2. If joint pattern not shown,provide joints not exceeding 15 feet in either direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible(at column centerlines or half bays). 3. Control Joint Sealant: As specified in Article 2.4 K, this Section. Install per manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. B. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofmg and to receive thru-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, relieving angles, and other conditions. C. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms,bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. 3.6 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Form Release Agent: Colorless material, compatible with the surface being cured,which shall not bond to, stain or adversely affect the concrete surfaces and shall not impair subsequent curing/treatment of or adhesion to the concrete surface. Form release agents shall not be used on surfaces to receive epoxy or other special coatings. 1. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining,rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously,provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches(600 mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 13117 SECTION 03 30 00-7 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding,or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches(150 mm)into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate. E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints,until completing placement of a panel or section. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement,other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement. 4. Construction requirement to achieve floor finish tolerances for unshored composite metal deck and beam construction: a. Forms shall be properly leveled and in good condition and securely anchored including special attention to ends and transitions. b. Bearing surfaces for straightedges such as formed edges or previously poured slabs shall be kept clean of laitance,sand,gravel or other foreign elements. c. Screeds shall be maintained in good condition with true round rolling wheels and level cutting edges. The use of optical sighting equipment such as lasers is recommended for checking levelness and straightness. The Contractor shall promptly adjust or replace equipment when test results indicate substandard work. d. Highway straightedges are recommended for use in lieu of bullfloats for all slab placement and finishing operations. F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F(4 deg C),uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C)and not more than 80 deg F(27 deg C)at point of placement. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. H. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete,place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 13117 SECTION 03 30 00-8 PERhIIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas. 4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions,as acceptable to Architect. 3.8 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch(6 mm)in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch holes and defects using concrete surfacer. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls,horizontal offsets,and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, Portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material,and where indicated. B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive float finish and other finishes,slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing,membrane or elastic roofing, and where indicated. 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. 2. Begin floating,using float blades or float shoes only,when surface water has disappeared,or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats,or both. 3. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness)and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155(ASTM E 1155M). Cut down high spots and fill low spots. 4. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. 5. Immediately after leveling,refloat surface to a uniform,smooth,granular texture. C. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system. 1. After floating,begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel. 2. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 13117 SECTION 03 30 00-9 PERMIT SET 11 08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 30 (floor flatness) and F(L) 25 (floor levelness)measured according to ASTM E 1155(ASTM E 1155M). 4. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar,apply a trowel finish as specified,then immediately follow by slightly scarifying the surface with a fine broom. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed,after work of other trades is in place. 1. Mix,place,and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. 2. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work. 3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during fmishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating,but before power floating and troweling. B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and fmishing. Weather permitting,keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. C. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing,and by combinations thereof,as herein specified. D. Provide moisture curing by following methods. 1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 2. Use continuous water-fog spray. 3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover,thoroughly saturate cover with water,and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges,with 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. E. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: 1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. F. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams,supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed,continue curing by methods specified above,as applicable. G. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces,such as slabs,floor topping,and other flat surfaces, by application of appropriate curing method. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 13117 SECTION 03 30 00- 10 PERMIT SET 11 08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.12 REMOVING FORMS A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work,may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form- removal operations,and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete,such as beam soffits,joists,slabs,and other structural elements, may not be removed sooner than indicated on structural drawings days unless concrete is post-tensioned. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. C. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.13 REUSE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement,thoroughly clean surfaces,remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect. 3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removing forms,when acceptable to Architect. B. Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh(1.2 mm)sieve,using only enough water as required for handling and placing. 1. Cut out honeycombs,rock pockets,voids over 1/4 inch(6 mm)in any dimension,and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch(25 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. 2. For surfaces exposed to view,blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discoloration that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry-pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired,remove and replace the concrete. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 13117 SECTION 03 30 00- 11 PERMIT SET 11.08 13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope. 1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch(0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width,spalling,popouts, honeycombs,rock pockets,and other objectionable conditions. 2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect. 4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. E. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch(25 mm) or less in diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Place dry-pack before bonding agent has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and fmish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. F. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. G. Repair methods not specified above may be used,subject to acceptance of Architect. 3.15 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. General: The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test reports. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the following,as directed by Architect. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172,except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete;additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. b. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. Testing shall be perfomed at the point of discharge at the end of the pump hose. c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064;one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F(4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens. d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 13117 SECTION 03 30 00- 12 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39;one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu.m)plus additional sets for each 100 cu.yd. (76 cu.m)more than the first 100 cu.yd. (76 cu.m)of each concrete class placed in any one day;one specimen tested at 7 days,two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. 2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m),Architect may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. 4. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. 5. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. C. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, ready-mix producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials,compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. E. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42,or by other methods as directed. 3.16 CLEANING AND SEALING A. Work of this Section includes final cleaning of finished concrete surfaces to condition ready to receive finish materials. B. Remove stains, chips, dust and all other construction debris that might interfere with bond of finish materials. C. At all concrete floors scheduled to remain exposed,remove all temporary markings prior to sealing. 1. Sealing Coat: At all concrete floors scheduled to remain exposed, uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 13117 SECTION 03 30 00- 13 pERMrr SET u.0813 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members;AESS at exposed members. B. Base plates. C. Grouting under base plates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles,sizes,spacing,locations of structural members,openings,attachments,and fasteners. B. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work,verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC"Steel Construction Manual." B. Comply with Section 10 of AISC"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"for architecturally exposed structural steel. C. Fabricator. Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of documented experience. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M,Grade 50. C. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M,Grade 50. D. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500,Grade B. E. Steel Plate: ASTM A514/A514M. F. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel,ASTM A307,Grade A galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. G. Grout: Non-shrink,non-metallic aggregate type,complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M and capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi(48 MPa)at 28 days. H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard,complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricator's standard,complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. STRUCTURAL STEEL 13117 SECTION 05 12 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON STRUCTURAL STEEL 2.2 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. B. Fabricate connections for bolt,nut,and washer connectors. C. Develop required camber for members. 2.3 FINISH A. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed,field welded,in contact with concrete,or high strength bolted. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed. 3.2 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". B. Allow for erection loads,and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb,and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect. E. After erection,prime welds,abrasions,and surfaces not shop primed,except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. F. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces,complying with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth,splaying neatly to 45 degrees. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch(6 mm)per story,non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch(6 mm). END OF SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL 13117 SECTION 05 12 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior steel-stud soffit wall framing. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AISI "Specifications": Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's"Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members". B. Structural Performance: Fabricate and erect cold-formed metal framing with physical and structural properties as indicated. C. Provide minimum sizes as shown on architectural drawings unless heavier gages or flange widths are required to meet the performance requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop drawings showing layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing, fabrication, fastening and anchorage details,including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details,and attachments to other units of Work. Installation or erection instructions, including sequence of operations and requirements for temporary building. C. Mill certificates. D. Welder certificates. E. Research/evaluation reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3,"Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where metal framing is part of a fire-resistance-rated assembly, provide framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual," or by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing agency. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 13117 SECTION 05 40 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Allied American Studco,Inc. 2. American Studco,Inc. 3. Angeles Metal Systems. 4. California Metal Systems,Inc. 5. Dietrich Industries,Inc. 6. Knorr Steel Framing Systems. 7. Scafco Corp. 8. Studco of Hawaii,Inc. 9. United Construction Supply. 10. Western Metal Lath. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, G60 (Z180) zinc coating, Grade 33 (230) for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) and less; Grade 50 (340) for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inch(1.37 mm)and greater. B. Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard steel studs, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955,and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated in drawings. 2. Flange Width: As indicated in drawings. 3. Section Properties: In conformance with Metal Stud Manufacturer's Association KBO Evaluation Report No.4943. 4. Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track,unpunched,with straight flanges,complying with ASTM C 955,manufacturer's standard flange width, and minimum uncoated-steel thickness matching steel studs. 5. Stud Size: As indicated in drawings. 6. Stud Spacing: As indicated in drawings. C. Steel Clips: As indicated in drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and fmish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi(230 MPa),of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M,zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 minimum, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon- steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,Class C. D. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Design capacity shall be based on current ICBO Evaluation Report for the selected anchor. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 13117 SECTION 05 40 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING E. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Design capacity shall be based on current ICC Evaluation Report for the fastener selected. F. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated,self-drilling,self-threading steel drill screws. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Elco Drill-Flex. b. Hilti Kwik-Flex. G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035. H. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Preparation: Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction. contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction. B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to ASTM C 1007, manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing;do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. 3. Install framing members in one-piece lengths. 4. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. 5. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings,that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. 6. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. 7. Provide blocking as required to develop full bending capacity of wall studs and floor joists. C. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet(1:960)and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. D. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold- formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 13117 SECTION 05 40 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. 1. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspection. 2. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements. 3. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. END OF SECTION COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 13117 SECTION 05 40 00-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior steel pipe handrails. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Grout. 2. Shop primer. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations,sections,details of installation,and attachments to other Work. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Metal Surfaces,General: Provide materials with smooth,flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 2.2 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Exterior Handrails: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following for exterior use: a. Carboline Company;Carboline 11 VOC,2-4 mils. c. Sherwin Williams;Zinc-Clad IV,3-5 mils thickness. b. Tnemec Company,Inc.;Tneme-Zinc 90-97,3-4 mils. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Nonshrink,Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged,nonstaining,noncorrosive,nongaseous grout. METAL FABRICATIONS 13117 SECTION 05 50 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON METAL FABRICATIONS 2.4 FABRICATION A. Connections,General:Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 1. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately.Remove burrs. 2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth, and contour welded surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 3. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes. 4. Form exposed connections with hairline joints,flush and smooth,using concealed fasteners where possible.Locate joints where least conspicuous. B. Exterior Steel Handrails: Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes, including pitting,rust and scale seam marks,roller marks,rolled trade names,and roughness. 1. Remove blemishes by filling,grinding,or by welding and grinding,prior to cleaning,treating,and shop priming. 2. Provide closure plates at ends of hollow or tube-shaped members; weld continuously and grind smooth. 3. Finish all welds as follows per NOMMA"Guideline 1:Joint Finishes": a. Exterior Steel Handrails: Finish#1,no evidence of a welded joint. 2.5 STEEL FINISHES A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. B. Surface Preparation: Perform manufacturer's standard cleaning operations to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. C. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Shop prime ferrous-metal items not indicated to be galvanized. 1. Preparation for Shop Priming: Unless noted otherwise,prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3,"Power Tool Cleaning." a. Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting. b. Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces of Exterior Steel Handrails to comply with SSPC- SP 6,"Commercial Blast Cleaning." METAL FABRICATIONS 13117 SECTION 05 50 00-2 PERMIT SE7 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON METAL FABRICATIONS PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location,with edges and surfaces level,plumb,and true. 1. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry,or similar construction. B. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection. 1. Painted Surfaces:Clean field welds,bolted connections,and abraded areas and touch up paint with the same material as used for shop painting. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS 13117 SECTION 05 50 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ROUGH CARPENTRY AND SHEATHING PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Exterior wall sheathing. 4. Plywood wall and roof sheathing. 5. Weather-resistive barrier. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product indicated. 1. Include data for wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following: 1. Treated wood. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer,Weather-Resistive Barrier: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized,or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product,that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty, and that has a history of not less than three projects similar to requirements for this Project with satisfactory in-service performance. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists,the following requirements apply for product selection: ROUGH CARPENTRY AND SHEATHING 13117 SECTION 06 10 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ROUGH CARPENTRY AND SHEATHING 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the manufacturers specified. 2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS,GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber,S4S,unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal(38-mm actual)thickness or less,unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Structural Panels: 1. Plywood:DOC PS 1. 2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron(SBX). B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. C. Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings,and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases,blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing,flashing,vapor barriers,and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Load-Bearing Partitions: No. 2 grade. 1. Application: Exterior walls. 2. Species: a. Douglas fir-larch;WCLIB or WWPA. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attachment of other construction,including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. ROUGH CARPENTRY AND SHEATHING 13117 SECTION 06 10 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ROUGH CARPENTRY AND SHEATHING B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of any species. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and the following species and grades: 1. Western woods,Construction or No.2 Common grade;WCLIB or WWPA. 2.6 SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. 1. Type and Thickness: As indicated. B. Sheathing Tape: Tape designed and manufactured to seal joints in exterior sheathing against water and air infiltration, formulated with an adhesive that permanently bonds to exterior sheathing substrates and recommended by sheathing manufacturer for use with type of sheathing required. C. Siliconized Emulsion Sealant: Complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sealant tape and exterior sheathing. 1. Recommended by manufacturers of both sheathing and tape for use with sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. 2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch(13 mm)thick. 3. Edge and End Configuration: Square. D. Plywood Wall and Roof Sheathing: Exterior-grade sheathing; see structural drawings. 2.7 WEATHER-RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Weather-Resistive Barrier: Single-component elastomeric membrane for spray, brush or trowel application. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ExoAir 230 by Tremco or products by one of the following: a. Henry Company. b. BASF. B. Membrane Tape: Self-adhering vapor-permeable membrane recommended by weather-resistive barrier manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in weather-resistive barrier. C. Waterproof Membrane: 45-mil, self-adhering rubberized asphalt and polyethylene membrane with metallic aluminum film or HDPE facing. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ExoAir 110 by Tremco or products by one of the following: a. Henry Company. b. BASF. ROUGH CARPENTRY AND SHEATHING 13117 SECTION 06 10 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ROUGH CARPENTRY AND SHEATHING 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity,provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 3. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563(ASTM A 563M)hex nuts and,where indicated,flat washers. 4. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954,except with wafer heads and reamer wings. 5. Nails,Brads,and Staples: ASTM F 1667. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction;scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring,nailers, blocking,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction,"unless otherwise indicated. C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. D. Fastening Methods: 1. Sheathing: Nail to wood framing. 2. Plywood Wall and Roof Sheathing: Screw to supports;see structural drawings. 3. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports. E. Apply sheathing tape to joints between sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing. F. Weather-Resistive Barrier: Install weather-resistive barrier to wall sheathing as specified as detailed on drawings and approved shop drawings. 1. Weather lap edges 6 inches and ends minimum 6 inches,minimum. 2. Stagger vertical joints of each layer. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY AND SHEATHING 13117 SECTION 06 10 00-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glulam timber, engineered, stress-rated products assembled from selected and prepared wood laminations bonded together with adhesives with the grain of the laminations approximately parallel longitudinally. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For glulam timber and accessories. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide factory-glued structural units produced by an AITC-licensed firm. 1. Factory mark each piece of structural glulam timber with AITC Quality Mark. Place mark on surfaces that will not be exposed in completed Work. B. Quality Standard: Comply with AITC A190.1,"Structural Glued Laminated Timber." 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with provisions in AITC 111, "Recommended Practice for Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber during Transit,Storage,and Erection." B. Individually wrap members with plastic-coated paper covering,with water-resistant seams. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL GLULAM TIMBER FRAMING A. Species and Grades for Beams, Purlins, and Arches: Comply with AITC 117--MANUFACTURING requirements. 1. Species and Combination Symbol:Douglas fir,24FV4. B. Appearance Grade: AITC 110,Framing appearance grade. C. Regional Materials: Glued-laminated timber shall be manufactured within 500 miles(800 km)of Project site from wood that has been harvested and milled within 500 miles(800 km)of Project site D. Certified Wood: Glued-laminated timber shall be certified as "FSC Pure"{ or "FSC Mixed Credit"] according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to FSC STD- 40-004,"FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification." E. Adhesive: Wet-use type complying with ASTM D 2559. STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 11128 SECTION 06 18 50- 1 PERMIT SET 08.14.12 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 1. Adhesive shall not contain urea-formaldehyde resins. F. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish. G. Connectors,Anchors,and Accessories: Fabricate from structural-steel shapes,plates,and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M; steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020; and hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 570/A 570M,Grade 33. 1. Finish each assembly and fastener with rust-inhibitive primer,2-mil(0.05-mm)dry film thickness. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and drilling bolt holes. B. Camber: Fabricate beams with a camber radius equal to 3,500 feet. C. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end-cutting each member to final length and after wood treatment(if any), apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces flood- coated for not less than 10 minutes. D. Seal Coat: After fabricating and sanding each unit,and end-coat sealing,apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit, except for treated wood where treatment included a water repellent. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Erect structural glulam timber framing true and plumb, with uniform, close-fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. 1. Use padded slings and protect corners with wood blocking. B. Fit structural glulam timber framing by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing. Predrill for fasteners and assembly of units. 1. Use connectors as templates for drilling bolt holes. 2. Coat crosscuts with end sealer. C. Cutting: Avoid extra cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication. D. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful purpose, including protection from weather,soiling,and damage from work of other trades. END OF SECTION STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 13117 SECTION 06 18 50-2 PERMIT SET 11.08 13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BENTONITE WATERPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes geotextile-faced bentonite waterproofing membrane or composite membrane bentonite waterproofing,at Contractor's option. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. General: Provide waterproofing products that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight continuous seals. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product data and general recommendations from waterproofing materials manufacturer for types of waterproofing required. B. Samples of membrane waterproofmg and auxiliary materials as requested by Architect. C. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that Installers comply with requirements under the "Quality Assurance"Article. D. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of waterproofmg with requirements and other physical properties reported by manufacturer based on comprehensive testing of products according to current standard test methods within previous 5 years. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Obtain primary waterproofmg materials of each type required from a single manufacturer,to greatest extent possible. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified in writing by waterproofing manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's waterproofing. C. Preinstallation Conference: Prior to installation of waterproofing and associated work,meet at project site with Installer of each component of associated work,inspection and testing agency representatives(if any), and installers of work requiring coordination with waterproofmg work. Review material selections and procedures to be followed in performing work. Notify Architect at least 48 hours before conducting meeting. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Substrate: Proceed with work after substrate construction, openings, and penetrating work have been completed. B. Weather: Proceed with waterproofing and associated work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements. BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 13117 SECTION 07 17 13- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace membrane waterproofing that fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. This Warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty period is 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GEOTEXTILE-FACED BENTONITE WATERPROOFING A. General: One woven and one non-woven polypropylene geotextile interlocked with inner layer of pure, high-swelling Wyoming bentonite,interlock to be made by needlepunching process integrating non-woven geotextile through the bentonite into the woven geotextile. B. Bentonite: 1. Minimum of 90% montmorillonite, maximum 10% unaltered volcanic ash and other native sediments. 2. Free Swell Rating: 2 grams sifted into deionized water swells to occupy a minimum volume of 16 cc. 3. Grading: 90%passing a 20 mesh sieve,less than 10%passing a 200 mesh sieve. C. Geotextile Fabric: 1. Grab Strength(ASTM D4632): Woven: 109 lbs;Non-woven: 6 lbs. 2. Grab Elongation(ASTM D4632): Woven: 15%;Non-woven: 150%. 3. Mass/Area(ASTM D5261): Woven: 3.3 oz./sq.yd;Non-woven: 6.0 oz./sq.yd. D. Geotextile-Faced Bentonite Waterproofing: 1. Peel Adhesion to Concrete(ASTM D903 mod.): 15 lbs./in.min. 2. Grab Tensile Strength(ASTM D4632):95 lbs./in. 3. Puncture Resistance(ASTM D4833): 100 lbs. 4. Low Temperature Flexibility(ASTM D1970): Unaffected at-25°F. 5. Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance(ASTM D5385 mod.):231 ft. 6. Permeability(ASTM D5084): 1 x 10'9 cm./sec. 7. Geotextile Interlock Peel(ASTM D4632): 15 lbs. E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Volclay Voltex,by Cetco. 2.2 COMPOSITE MEMBRANE BENTONITE WATERPROOFING A. Bentonite: 1 Minimum of 90% montmorillonite, maximum 10% unaltered volcanic ash and other native sediments. BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 13117 SECTION 07 1713-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 2. Free Swell Rating: 2 grams sifted into deionized water swells to occupy a minimum volume of 16 cc. B. Membrane Composite: High-density polyethylene or manufacturer's standard geomembrane. 1. Tear Resistance(ASTM D1004): 33 lbs. 2. Permeability(ASTM D5084): 3 x 10.10 cm./sec 3. Puncture Resistance(FTMS 101C): 60 lbs. 4. Pliability(ASTM D746): Passed. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Paraseal by Tremco Incorporated. 2. Volclay Swelltite by Cetco. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Manufacturer's standard accessories detailing of terminations, seams, penetrations, recesses, cants and corner transitions,including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Adhesive: Water-based adhesive as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 2. Hydrobar Tube: Water-soluble tube container filled with granular bentonite. 3. Waterstoppage: Specially processed dry granular bentonite. 4. Termination Bar: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Seam Tape: Manufacturer's standard. B. Drainage Panel: Composite subsurface drainage panel consisting of a studded,nonbiodegradable,molded- plastic-sheet drainage core;with a nonwoven,needle-punched geotextile facing. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation when areas to receive work are flooded or excessively wet. Consult manufacturer's representative for site-specific recommendations and requirements. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for surface preparation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling and installation of waterproofing materials. B. Coordinate installation of waterproofing materials and associated work to provide complete system complying with combined recommendations of manufacturers and installers involved in work. Schedule installation to minimize period of exposure of waterproofing materials. C. Detail all penetrations with waterstoppage below waterproofing and mastic over waterproofing. D. Lap adjoining edges a minimum 4"; stagger end seams a minimum 24". Fasten waterproofing as required to prevent movement during concrete placement. E. At vertical walls,terminate at indicated elevation with metal termination bar installed per manufacturer's recommendations. BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 13117 SECTION 07 17 13-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 3.4 CLEANING A. After completion,remove any masking materials and stains from exposed surfaces caused by waterproofing installation. END OF SECTION BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 13117 SECTION 07 17 13-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed building insulation. 2. Vapor retarders. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Product test reports. C. Research/evaluation reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated,as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-burning characteristics, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. B. High-Density Glass Fiber Batt Insulation,Unfaced: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665,Type II,Class C;friction fit. 1. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for facing,if any. 2. R-Value: R15,as determined in accordance with the U.S.FTC R-value rule. C. Spray Foamed Insulation: Medium-density, rigid or semi-rigid, open or closed cell polyurethane foam; foamed on-site,using blowing agent of water or non-ozone-depleting gas. 1. Water Absorption: Less than 2 percent by volume, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2842. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Froth-Pak;Dow Building Solutions. 3. R-Value: R30,as determined in accordance with the U.S.FTC R-value rule. BUILDING INSULATION 13117 SECTION 07 21 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BUILDING INSULATION D. Spandrel Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation; ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450,respectively,per ASTM E 84. 1. Type X, 15 psi(104 kPa). 2. Thickness: 2 inches. 2.2 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils(0.15 mm)thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm(7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq.m). B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. B. Installation of General Building Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 1. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: a. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. b. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 2. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches(2438 mm) support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. B. Installation of Spandrel Insulation: Install board insulation in storefront construction where indicated on Drawings. 1. Hold insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window frames,spaced at intervals recommended by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between insulation and glass. BUILDING INSULATION 13117 SECTION 07 21 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BUILDING INSULATION C. Installation of Vapor Retarders: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. 1. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top,end,and bottom edges;at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches(406 mm)o.c. 2. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor- retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. 3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. 4. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. 5. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. END OF SECTION BUILDING INSULATION 13117 SECTION 07 21 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Flat metal wall and soffit panels. 2. Ribbed metal panels. 3. Concealed-fastener,standing-seam metal wall panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section"Rough Carpentry and Sheathing." 2. Division 07 Section`Building Insulation." 3. Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants." 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Components: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with Project requirements shown(but not limited to)the Structural Drawings. B. Movement: Accommodate movement within system without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within system; movement between system and perimeter components when subject to seasonal temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release of loads; and deflection of structural support framing. See Structural Drawings for movement information. C. Drainage: Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or condensation occurring within panel system. D. Provide continuity of air barrier and vapor retarder seal at building enclosure elements (and interface locations) in conjunction with materials specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim". E. Panel Flatness: All exposed flat exterior metal panels shall be designed,fabricated, and installed in such a manner that they are visually flat when viewed from any angle. Any short length distortions,ripples, waves,oil canning,or telegraphing of fasteners will not be permitted. Provisions shall be made to allow for differential thermal expansion between framing members and the exposed metal without noise and without distortion of the exposed face. 1. In the event that metal flatness requires interpretation by measurement, this shall be done by measuring and calculating the deviation between edges or any two points on the exposed surface. Total deviation(d) from flatness shall not exceed 0.003 times the length(L), and 0.004 times the width(W),and 0.0035 times any chord of at least 12 inches. 2. Panel flatness shall be subject to visual inspection and approval by the Architect. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions,layout,joints,construction details,methods of anchorage. METAL WALL PANELS 13117 SECTION 07 42 13- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON METAL WALL PANELS B. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of metal wall panel, 12 inch by 12 inch in size illustrating fmish color,sheen,and texture. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 5 years of experience. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. B. Store prefinished material off ground and protected from weather. Prevent twisting,bending,or abrasion, and provide ventilation to stored materials. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials that may cause discoloration or staining of products. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the Work with installation of vapor retarder and air barrier seals. 1.8 WARRANTY A. See Division 01 Section"Contract Closeout"for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five-year period after Substantial Completion for degradation of panel finish,including color fading caused by exposure to weather. C. Correct defective Work within a five-year period after Substantial Completion,including defects in water tightness and integrity of seals. D. Warrant finish against deterioration or delamination for a period of 10 years after Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED METAL PANELS A. General: Fabricate panel face sheets to the profile or configuration indicated; and of the material, finish, and thickness indicated. Design joints between panels to form weathertight seals. B. Flat Metal Panel MP-1: 1. Single-Skin Honeycomb Panels, Dry-Joint System: Skyline Sheet Metal SSMSS — "HC SKYCORE". a. Aluminum Sheet Thickness: 0.040". b. Honeycomb Core: 3000 Series Abiminum Commercial Grade. c. Aluminum Backer Sheet: ASTM B209 Aluminum Association Specification Sheet 3003- H14/3105-H14. 1) Aluminum Sheet Thickness: Match front face. 2. Finish: AAMA 2605,three-coat thermally cured fluoropolymer system,70%Kynar 500. METAL WALL PANELS 13117 SECTION 07 42 13-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON METAL WALL PANELS a. Color: To match MP-2. 3. Apply stiffeners as required by manufacturer to maintain flat panel surface. 4. Provide manufacturer's standard accessories, including fasteners, clips, anchorage devices and attachments specific to SkyCore Wall Cladding System. C. Ribbed Metal Panel MP-2: 1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet:Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653,G90. 2. Surface: Smooth,flat,mill finish. 3. Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements, including design wind loads, on substrate or structural framing system provided. a. Minimum 22-gauge. 4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard Kynar 500. 5. Color: Manufacturer's standard`Dark Bronze'. 6. Basis-of-Design: The configuration of ribbed metal panels is based on Panel MX 1.0 by Morin Corporation. a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by another manufacturer,contingent on Architect's approval prior to Bid. Submit Substitution Request prior to Bid Date in accordance with Division 01 Section "Product Substitutions". D. Standing-Seam Metal Wall Panel MP-3: 1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet:Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653,G90. 2. Surface: Smooth,flat,mill finish. 3. Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements, including design wind loads, on substrate or structural framing system provided. a. Minimum 22-gauge. 4. Profile: Match existing wall panels. 5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard Kynar 500. 6. Color: To match MP-2. E. Internal and External Corners: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets; profile to suit system;brake formed to required angles. F. Expansion Joints: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; manufacturer's standard brake formed type,of profile to suit system. G. Trim, Closure Pieces, Caps, Flashings, and Fascias: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets;brake formed to required profiles. H. Anchors: Stainless steel. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with system,permanently resilient;ultraviolet and ozone resistant. METAL WALL PANELS 13117 SECTION 07 42 13-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON METAL WALL PANELS B. Sealants: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with installation of system;non-staining;color as selected;see Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants". C. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application;with soft neoprene washers,stainless steel. 1. At exterior exposed application of ribbed metal panels,use stainless-steel fasteners with metal and neoprene bonded washers,color-coated to match panels. a. Field Touch-up Paint: As recommended by panel manufacturer. 2.3 SECONDARY FRAMING A. Panel Supports and Anchorage: Provide cold-formed stud framing, furring channels, angles, plates, bracing,and other secondary framing members. 1. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. Cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G200 (Z610) hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated a. Flange and Sag Bracing: 1-5/8-by-1-5/8-inch angles, fabricated from 0.0598-inch-thick, shop-painted,roll-formed steel. b. Base or Sill Angles: Fabricate from 0.079-inch-thick, cold-formed, galvanized steel sections. Factory finished to match siding panels. c. Secondary structural members, except columns and beams, shall be manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from 0.079-inch-thick,cold-formed galvanized steel. 2. Adjustable aluminum angle brackets. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape,accurate in size,square,and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest practicable lengths. C. Weld all corners and seams and grind smooth. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panels. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install panels on walls as detailed and in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install ribbed panels with ribs in horizontal orientation. C. Fasten panels to structural supports;aligned,level,and plumb. D. Use concealed fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect. E. Do not allow panel attachment to penetrate air barrier. METAL WALL PANELS 13117 SECTION 07 42 13-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON METAL WALL PANELS 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Offset from True Alignment between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 1/4 inch. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. B. Clean and wash prefmished surfaces with mild soap and water;rinse with clean water. 3.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Color Consistency: 1. To assure consistency of paint color and tonality in the fmished Work, the Contractor shall propose and implement a quality control program to the approval of the Architect. 2. No production coating application shall commence prior to approval of this quality control program by the Architect and Owner. Notwithstanding the implementation of an approved quality control program,any installed work with coating defects or variation in color or tonality in excess of the approved sample range shall be subject to rejection. 3. Prior to production coating,the Contractor shall present for approval sample panels representative of the fmished work. 4. Provide and furnish a compatible field touch-up PVDF coating system formulated for air-drying at ambient temperature,based on the Kynar ADS fluoropolymer resin, in color to match the factory applied finish. Submit samples of the air dry system as well as samples of actual touch-up work to factory applied coating system,subject to sample approval procedures described herein. B. Adjusting: 1. Repair panels with minor damage such that repairs are not discernible at a distance of 10 feet. 2. Remove and replace panels damaged beyond repair. 3. Remove from project site damaged panels,protective film and other debris attributable to work of this section. C. Protection: Protect installed product's finish surfaces from damage during construction. 1. Institute protective measures as required ensuring that installed panels will not be damaged. END OF SECTION METAL WALL PANELS 13117 SECTION 07 42 13-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following adhered and loosely laid and ballasted membrane roofmg systems: 1. Mechanically attached TPO membrane over insulation. 2. TPO liner at existing metal gutter. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations,sections,details,and attachments to other Work. 1. Show full extent of plaza paver system,including dimensioned layout drawings showing all joints, relationship to roof and overflow drains,guardrails and supports and any special conditions. C. Samples: For each product included in membrane roofmg system, including samples of plaza paver for selection by Architect. D. Research/evaluation reports. E. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from or approved by roofing membrane manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofmg materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL,FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class C;ASTM E 108,for application and roof slopes indicated. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofmg system that fail in materials or workmanship within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roof leaks. SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 13117 SECTION 07 54 23 - 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work are limited to the manufacturers specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work are limited to the products specified. 2.2 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING MEMBRANE A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: Uniform, flexible sheet formed from a thermoplastic polyolefin,internally fabric or scrim reinforced,and as follows: 1. Manufacturers: a. GAF Materials Corporation. b. Johns Manville. c. Mule-Hide Products Co.,Inc. 2. Thickness: 60 mils(1.5 mm),nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color White. 4. Physical Properties: a. Breaking Strength: 225 lbf(1 kN);ASTM D 751,grab method. b. Elongation at Break: 15 percent;ASTM D 751. c. Tearing Strength: 55 lbf(245 N)minimum;ASTM D 751,Procedure B. d. Brittleness Point: Minus 22 deg F(30 deg C). e. Ozone Resistance: No cracks after sample, wrapped around a 3-inch- (75-mm-) diameter mandrel,is exposed for 166 hours to a temperature of 104 deg F(40 deg C) and an ozone level of 100 pphm(100 mPa);ASTM D 1149. f. Resistance to Heat Aging: 90 percent minimum retention of breaking strength, elongation at break,and tearing strength after 166 hours at 240 deg F(116 deg C);ASTM D 573. g. Water Absorption: Less than 4 percent mass change after 166 hours'immersion at 158 deg F(70 deg C);ASTM D 471. h. Linear Dimension Change: Plus or minus 2 percent;ASTM D 1204. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofmg. B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, 55 mils (1.4 mm)thick,minimum,of same color as sheet membrane. C. Roof Penetration Seal: Manufacturer's standard sealant pocket system with pourable sealer; use components recommended by manufacturer for size of roof penetration. 1. Prefabricated curb or support strip and flashing. SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 13117 SECTION 07 54 23-2 PERMIT SET 1108.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 2. Pourable Sealer: Two-component,self-leveling thermosetting RTV urethane. a. Hardness,Shore A:30. b. Elongation: 212%,ASTM D412; 100 mil @ 700 F. c. Specific Gravity: 1.23. d. Tensile Strength: 200 ASTM D412, 100 mil. E. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard water-based bonding adhesive for membrane, and solvent- based bonding adhesive for base flashings. F. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch(25 mm)wide by 0.05 inch(1.3 mm)thick,prepunched. G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch(25 by 3 mm)thick;with anchors. H. Protective Mat: Manufacturer's standard nonwoven polyester fabric. I. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers,termination reglets, cover strips, slip sheet,and other accessories. 2.4 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Install insulation thickness as required to attain average thermal resistance R-value of R-30. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches(1:48),unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 2.6 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 13117 SECTION 07 54 23-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofmg to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where required by required overall insulation thickness, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches(150 nun)in each direction. E. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners,perimeter,and field of roof. 3.2 MECHANICALLY FASTENED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. 1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5082. B. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofmg membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofmg. C. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Repair tears,voids,and lapped seams in roofmg membrane that does not meet requirements. D. In-Splice Attachment: Secure one edge of roofing membrane using fastening plates or metal battens centered within membrane splice and mechanically fasten roofing membrane to roof deck. Field-splice seam. E. Through-Membrane Attachment: Secure roofing membrane using fastening plates or metal battens and mechanically fasten roofing membrane to roof deck. Cover battens and fasteners with a continuous cover strip. 3.3 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing. D. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings. 3.4 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 13117 SECTION 07 54 23-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofmg system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofmg system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. END OF SECTION SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 13117 SECTION 07 54 23-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed copings at parapets. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 Section"Rough Carpentry and Sheathing" for wood nailers,curbs,and blocking. 2. Division 07 Section "Single-Ply Membrane Roofing" for materials and installation of sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing. 3. Division 07 Section"Metal Wall Panels"for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with metal wall panels. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed,and joints and seams in adjacent materials. B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof,secure,and noncorrosive installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Include plans,elevations,sections,and attachment details. 2. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and fmish for each item and location in Project. 3. Include details for forming,including profiles,shapes,seams,and dimensions. 4. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches(1:10). C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed fmish. 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners,cleats,clips,closures,and other attachments. D. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 13117 SECTION 07 62 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.03.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity,except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes,but is not limited to,the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking,checking,peeling,or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle,leak,or loosen,and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofmg Manual" and SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections,and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F(67 deg C),ambient; 180 deg F(100 deg C),material surfaces. 2.2 SHEET METAL A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 13117 SECTION 07 62 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation, prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Surface: Smooth,flat. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Metallic Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Three-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended metallic flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare,pretreat,and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. 3. Color: To match MP-2. 4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer fmish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil(0.013 mm). 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M,Type II(No.30),asphalt-saturated organic felt;nonperforated. B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper,3 lb/100 sq. ft.(0.16 kg/sq.m)minimum. C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40 mils thick. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Bituthene Ice and Water Shield;Grace: W.R.Grace&Co. b. Nordshield Ice and WaterGard;Nord Bitumi US,Inc. c. Weather Watch;GAF Building Materials Corporation. d. Jiffy Seal Ice and Water Guard;Protecto Wrap Co. e. Lastobond by Soprema. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners,protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws,gasketed,with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory- applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 13117 SECTION 07 62 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 2. Fasteners for Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic,nonsag,nontoxic,nonstaining tape 1/2 inch(13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch(3 mm)thick. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187. F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586,asbestos free,of consistency required for application. 2.5 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements,but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,buckling, and tool marks;true to line,levels,and slopes;and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch(3-mm)offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet(3 m)with no joints allowed within 24 inches(610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof,form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch(25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). D. Sealant Joints: Where movable,nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible,noncorrosive metal. F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. 2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Coordinate formed shape at external leg with profile as detailed and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight. 1. Coping Profile: As detailed. 2. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch- (150-mm-)wide,concealed backup plate. 3. Fabricate from the following materials: SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 13117 SECTION 07 62 00-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM a. Galvanized Steel: 0.034 inch(0.86 mm)thick. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,substrate,and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound,dry,smooth,clean,sloped for drainage,and securely anchored. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment,wrinkle free,using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water,with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches(50 mm). B. Apply slip sheet,wrinkle free,over underlayment before installing sheet metal flashing and trim. C. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment as detailed at parapets. 3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place,with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners,solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants,and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line,levels, and slopes. Provide uniform,neat seams with minimum exposure of solder,welds,and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 1. Coat concealed side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood,ferrous metal,or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates,install underlayment and cover with slip sheet. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 13117 SECTION 07 62 00-5 PERM'SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM C. Expansion Provisions: Accommodate thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet(3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches(610 mm)of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch(25 mm)deep,filled with mastic sealant(concealed within joints). D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch(25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F(4 and 21 deg C),set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F(4 deg C). 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered,removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm); however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. 3. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 4. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line,levels,and slopes. Install work with laps,joints,and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with metal wall panels or glazed aluminum curtainwall as detailed. 2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch (600-mm)centers. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch(3- mm)offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 13117 SECTION 07 62 00-6 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess sealants. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction. C. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 13117 SECTION 07 62 00-7 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 1. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of windows and interior doors. b. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures. c. Other joints as indicated. B. Extent of each form and type of joint sealer is indicated on drawings and schedules. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum drywall partitions to reduce sound transmission characteristics. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Provide joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals. 1. Sealants shall withstand movements up to the limits prescribed by the manufacturer. 2. Exposed sealant surface shall not crack or bubble. 3. Sealants and primers shall not stain adjacent materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A Product Data from manufacturers for each joint sealer product required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application. B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available,for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealer required. Install joint sealer samples in 1/2 inch wide joints formed between two 6 inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within the last 3 years at least joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this Project. B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. JOINT SEALANTS 13117 SECTION 07 92 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11 08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON JOINT SEALANTS 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use,pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers' recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,high or low temperatures,contaminants,or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturers. 2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain,frost,condensation,or other causes. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after completion of waterproofing,unless otherwise indicated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with oneanother and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of basepolymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for Type,Grade,Class,and Uses. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealants which may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant(ES-1):Type S;Grade NS;Class 25;Uses NT,G,M, A,and,as applicable to joint substrates indicated,O. a. "Dow Corning 786";Dow Corning Corp. b. "863";Pecora Corp. c. "Rhodorsil 6B";Rhone-Poulenc Inc. JOINT SEALANTS 13117 SECTION 07 92 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON JOINT SEALANTS 2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, one part,nonsag,mildew-resistant, acrylic-emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, formulated to be paintable and recommended for exposed applications on interior and on protected exterior locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, latex joint sealants which may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant(LS-1): a. "Chem-Calk 600";Bostik Construction Products Div. b. "AC-20";Pecora Corp. c. "Sono lac";Sonneborn Building Products Div.;Rexnord Chemical Products,Inc. d. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834";Tremco Inc. 2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates,sealants,primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers (Backer Rod or Foam Tape), Typical: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible, nongassing plastic foam of material indicated below; nonabsorbent to water and gas; and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 1. Either open-cell polyurethane foam or closed-cell polyethylene foam, unless otherwise indicated, subject to approval of sealant manufacturer,for cold-applied sealants only. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable tomanufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials,and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service performance. C. Masking Tape: Provide nonstaining, nonabsorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. JOINT SEALANTS 13117 SECTION 07 92 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON JOINT SEALANTS 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers'printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated,except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Latex Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 790 for use of latex sealants. C. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Sealants shall not be adhered to or placed against the edge of a laminated glass interlayer. D. Field Sealants: 1. All joints which are sealed in the field as part of the assembly and installation process shall be sealed according to the Drawings. 2. For other joints,select an appropriate sealant for joint size,movement and substrates. 3. Polybutane,oleo-resinous,asphaltic and other oil-base sealants are not acceptable for field use. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth,uniform beads of configuration indicated,to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 6A in ASTM C 962,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide recessed joint configuration per Figure 6C in ASTM C 962, of recess depth and at locations indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. JOINT SEALANTS 13117 SECTION 07 92 00-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON JOINT SEALANTS 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion.If,despite such protection,damage or deterioration occurs,cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealant installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 SCHEDULE B. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below: 1. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of windows and interior doors: LS-1. 2. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures: ES-1. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALANTS 13117 SECTION 07 92 00-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE DOOR DOOR/OPENING DOOR DOOR DOOR FRAME FRAME FRAME HDWE NO. FROM TO SIZE TYPE MATL FINISH TYPE MATL FINISH RATTING MARKS GROUP 10A 19 9 3'-0"x 7-0" A WD TF F 1 AL MFR 1 18A 19 9 3'-0"x 7-0" A WD TF F1 AL MFR 1 19A EXT 19 3'-0"x 8'-7-1/2" B AL/GL MFR F3 I AL MFR 2 19B EXT 19 3'-0"x 8'-7-1/2" B AL/GL MFR F3 AL MFR 2 19C EXT 19 PR 3'-0"x 7'-9-1/2" BB AL/GL MFR F3 AL MFR 3 19D EXT 19 2'-11"x 8'4" B AL/GL MFR F3 AL MFR 2 19E EXT 19 3'-0"x 7'-9-1/2" B AL/GL MFR F3 AL MFR 2 19F EXT 19 3'-0"x 7'-9-1/2" C HM PT F2 HM PT 4 19G EXT 19 12'-0"x 12'-0" D STL PT -- STL PT -- 19H EXT 19 PR 3'-0"x 7-9-1/2" CC HM PT F2 HM PT 5 DOOR TYPES FRAME TYPES A/AA: Flush wood door;see Section 08 14 16 F1: Prefinished aluminum frame with aluminum trim;see Section 08 12 13 BBB: Aluminum storefront entrance;see Section 08 41 13 F2: Hollow metal frame,field painted;see Section 08 11 13 C/CC: Hollow metal flush door,field painted;see Section 08 11 13 F3: Aluminum storefront;see Section 08 41 13 D: Overhead sectional door;see Section 08 36 13 LEGEND AL: Aluminum GL: Glass HM: Hollow metal MFR: By manufacturer PT: Field painted STL: Steel TF: Transparent finish WD: Wood GENERAL NOTES 1. All existing and relocated doors/closers to be checked,adjusted,and/or replaced to be in compliance with ADA. REMARKS A: DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE 13117 SECTION 08 00 00- 1 100%DD SET 09.20.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes interior aluminum door frames. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 08 Section"Flush Wood Doors". 2. Division 08 Section"Door Hardware". 3. Division 09 Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type of frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation,core,sound ratings,profiles,and finishes. B. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of door frames. 1. Include details of each frame type, elevations of frame types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements,and details of joints and connections. 2. Show anchorage and accessory items. 3. Show installation and finishing of custom reveal detail. 4. Show accommodation of wiring for security systems where they occur. C. Door and Relite Schedule: Submit schedule of frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Contract Drawings. 1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. 2. Show ratings of frame assemblies in fire-rated wall assemblies. D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for factory-finished frames. E. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples not less than 12 inches long and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations,include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished frames. B. Inspect frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect;otherwise,remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store frames at building site under cover in a dry location. Place units on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. 1. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 13117 SECTION 08 12 16- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 2. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet,remove cartons immediately. 3. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked units to promote air circulation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Alpha Aluminum Products,Inc.,Orange CA,or one of the following: 1. Western Integrated Materials,Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: 6063-T5 alloy and temper(ASTM B221,alloy G.S. 10A-T5). B. Supports and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard aluminum anchors; or steel if isolated from aluminum components per manufacturer's written instructions. C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units of aluminum, stainless steel, or zinc-plated steel,with dissimilar metals isolated per manufacturer's written instructions. 2.4 FRAMES A. Provide aluminum frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules. 1. Frame System: Flush trim system,with 1-1/2"x 5/16"trim and 1-1/2"mullions,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Conceal fastenings,unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners knocked down,for field assembly. 4. Include manufacturer's integral casings and black-finished reveals,as indicated in Drawings. B. Door Silencers: Providfe manufacturer's standard system on strike jambs of single-door frames and on heads of double-door frames;black color. C. Plaster Guards: Provide plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum frame units to be rigid,neat in appearance,and free from defects,warp,or buckle. 1. Where practical,fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. 2. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. B. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117"Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." C. Hardware Preparation: Prepare frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. D. Reinforce frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 13117 SECTION 08 12 16-2 PERMIT sar 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES E. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or,if not indicated,according to the Door and Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." F. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard vinyl gaskets,black. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611,AA-M12C22A31,Class II,0.010 mm or thicker. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install doors, frames, pass windows and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data,and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders,leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. C. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section"Glass and Glazing," unless otherwise indicated. D. Erection Tolerances: Install entrance systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Limit variation from plane or location shown to 1/8 inch in 12 feet(3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch(6 mm)over total length. 2. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Where surfaces meet at corners,limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch(0.8 mm). 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch(3 mm). 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 13117 SECTION 08 12 16-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections,apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent and location of each type of flush wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules. B. Types of doors required include the following: 1. Solid-core flush wood doors for transparent fmish with wood veneer faces. 2. Solid-core flush wood doors for opaque fmish with medium-density overlay or medium-density fiberboard faces. C. Factory-finishing of flush wood doors is included in this Section. D. Factory-prefitting to frames and factory-premachining for hardware for wood doors is included in this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of door, including details of core and edge construction,and factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data. 1. For factory-premachined doors,indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for locksets. C. Samples: Submit samples, 1-0"square or as indicated,for the following: 1. Factory-Finished Doors: Each type of factory finish required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards: 1. NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S.1 "Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors",of National Wood Window and Door Association(NWWDA). 2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"; including Section 1300 "Architectural Flush Doors", of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)for grade of door, core construction,finish and other requirements exceeding those of NWWDA quality standard. B. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle,Finish,Install,and Maintain Wood Doors",as well as with manufacturer's instructions. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 13117 SECTION 08 14 16- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON FLUSH WOOD DOORS B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door,frames,and hardware,using temporary,removable or concealed markings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to project's geographical location: 1. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-S-3 "Moisture Content". 1.7 WARRANTY A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer,Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow,cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. 1. Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering doors which may be incorporated in the work include the following: 1. Solid Core Doors: a. B-J Door;Milwaukie,Oregon. b. Pacific Architectural Wood Door;Portland,Oregon. 2.2 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Faces: Medium-density overlay. 2. AWI Grade: Premium. 3. Construction: PC(Particle board)core. a. 28-32 pcf core,fully bonded to stiles and rails using Type 1 glue. b. Stiles:Hardwood, 1-1/2"minimum. c. Top Rail: Mill-option softwood,2-1/4"minimum. d. Bottom Rail: Mill-option softwood,5"minimum. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 13117 SECTION 08 14 16-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON FLUSH WOOD DOORS 4. Veneer: Quartersawn African mahogany. B. Solid Core Doors for Opaque Finish: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Faces: Medium-density overlay. 2. AWI Grade: Premium. 3. Construction: PC-5 (Particle board core,5-ply). 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying with following requirements: 1. Factory-prefit and premachine doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels: a. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for prefitting. Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates. b. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory premachining. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced AWI quality standard including Section 1500"Factory Finishing". B. Prefmish wood doors at factory. C. Opaque Finish: Shop prime for field finish; see Division 09 Section"Painting". D. Transparent Finish: Custom finish as follows: 1. Finish by Pacific Architectural Wood Products. a. Prior approval by Owner is required for alternate fmish systems. 2. Sand and prepare door for finishing. 3. Apply light amber colored"PacAmber" stain. 4. Apply one coat sanding sealer. 5. Sand. 6. Apply one coat shading lacquer. 7. Apply one top coat. 8. Sand. 9. Apply final top coat. 10. Poly bag for protection. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door: 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 13117 SECTION 08 14 16-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON FLUSH WOOD DOORS B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation see Division 8"Finish Hardware"section of these specifications. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions, applicable requirements of referenced AWI standard,and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No. 80. C. Job-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Fitting Clearances for Non-Rated Doors: Provide 1/8" at jambs and heads; 1/16" per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors;and 1/8" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled,provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Fitting Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: Complying with NFPA 80. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Prefit Doors: Fit to frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at the job site. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Refmish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION FLUSH WOOD DOORS 13117 SECTION 08 14 16-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes steel sectional overhead doors. B. Division 26 Sections for electrical service, connections, disconnects, and circuit breakers for powered operators,and accessories. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of components: 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting inward and outward. 2. Operational Life: Design components to operate for not less than 10,000 cycles. a. Operation Cycle: One complete cycle begins with door in closed position. Door is then moved to open position and back to closed position. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, wiring diagrams, and attachments to other Work. 1. Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Samples: For each exposed finish. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for sectional overhead door is based on 418 Series,Overhead Door Corporation. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 13117 SECTION 08 36 13- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08 13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 1. Ideal Door. 2. Raynor Garage Doors. 3. Windsor Door;a United Dominion Company. 4. Wayne-Dalton Corp. 2.2 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS A. General: Fabricated from galvanized,structural-quality commercial steel with minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi(225 MPa)and complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,G60(Z180)zinc coating. 1. Steel Sheet Thickness: 20-gauge. 2. Exterior Section Face: Flat,grooved or ribbed. B. Door Panels: Fabricated from a single sheet with sections not more than 24 inches (600 mm) high and nominally 2 inches (50 mm) deep. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted,shiplap,or tongue-in-groove weathertight seal,with a reinforcing flange return. 1. Insulated Doors: With continuous thermal-break construction separating faces of door. C. Door Sections: Enclose open section with not less than 0.064-inch (1.6-mm) galvanized steel channel end stiles welded in place. Fabricate with not less than 0.064-inch (1.6-mm) galvanized intermediate stiles,cut to door section profile,spaced at not more than 48 inches(1200 mm)o.c.,and welded in place. 1. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle complying with bottom section pro- file. 2. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement of galvanized steel bars, struts,trusses or strip steel,formed to depth and bolted or welded in place. 3. Reinforce for hardware attachment. 4. Insulation: Insulate inner core of steel sections with rigid cellular polystyrene or polyurethane thermal insulation, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84; or with fiberglass thermal insulation. Enclose insulation completely,with no exposed insulation material evident. a. Installation: Foam in place to completely fill inner core. b. Steel Sheet Inside Face: Manufacturer's standard. c. Thermal Resistance: R-5 minimum. D. Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints, and free of warp,twist,and deformation. E. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer, compatible with field-applied fmish. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,pretreatment,application,and minimum dry film thickness. 2.3 TRACKS,SUPPORTS,AND ACCESSORIES A. Tracks: Galvanized steel track system complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coating, sized for door size and weight,designed for lift type indicated. 1. Provide complete track assembly including brackets,bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. 2. Slot vertical sections of track at 2 inches(50 mm)o.c. for door-drop safety device. SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 13117 SECTION 08 36 13-2 PERMIT SET 11.08 13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 3. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or otherwise design to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. 4. Weld or bolt to track supports. B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized steel and support members, complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 123. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. C. Support and attach tracks to opening jambs with continuous angle welded to tracks and attached to wall. Support horizontal (ceiling) tracks with continuous angle welded to track and supported by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members at curve and end of tracks. D. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl,rubber,or neoprene fitted to bottom and at top of overhead door. 1. Motor-Operated Doors: With combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge. 2. Jamb Seals: Continuous flexible seals at door jambs for weathertight installation. 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: Heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners,to suit door type. B. Hinges: Heavy-duty galvanized steel hinges, of not less than 0.0747-inch- (1.9-mm-) thick uncoated steel, at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, per manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. 1. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not possible. C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers,with steel ball bearings in case-hardened steel races,mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. 1. Double Hinges: Extend roller shaft through both hinges. 2. Roller Tires: 3-inch- (75-mm-) diameter roller tires for 3-inch(75-mm) track; 2-inch- (50-mm-) diameter roller tires for 2-inch(50-mm)track. D. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up-operated or emergency-operated doors, galvanized steel lifting handles on each side of door. E. Slide Bolt Fabricate with side locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on single jamb side,operable from inside only;screwed in unlocked position. F. Power-Operated Doors: With safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked. 2.5 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. Torsion Spring: Operation by counterbalance mechanism with adjustable-tension torsion springs, fabricated from oil-tempered-steel wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, Class II, mounted on cross-header tube or steel shaft. Connect to door with galvanized aircraft-type lift cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1. Calibrate springs for 10,000 cycles minimum. 1. Include weight of adhered aluminum wall panels in determination of proper calibration. SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 13117 SECTION 08 3613-3 PERMIT SET 11.08 13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS B. Cable Drums: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron castings grooved to receive cable. Mount counterbalance mechanism with ball-bearing brackets at each end of shaft. 1. Include one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet(4.87 m)long. C. Cable Safety Device: Spring-loaded, steel or bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side,designed to automatically stop door if either cable breaks. D. Bracket: Anchor support bracket, as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall, to level shaft and prevent sag. E. Spring Bumper: Include at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation. 2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. Electric Door Operator, General: Type, size, and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operational life specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, disconnect device, emergency auxiliary operator, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit- switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator. B. Electric Motors: Polyphase, medium-induction type with high-starting torque, reversible, continuous- duty,Class A insulated,electric motors,complying with NEMA MG 1;with overload protection,sized to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction, from any position,at not less than 2/3 fps (0.2 m/s) or more than 1 fps (0.3 m/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. Coordinate wiring requirements and electric characteristics of motors with building electrical system. 1. Provide open dripproof-type motor,and controller with NEMA ICS 6,Type 1 enclosure. 2. Include weight of adhered aluminum wall panels in determination of motor capacity. C. Control Equipment: NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit,maximum 24-V ac or dc. Provide momentary-contact,three-button control station. 1. Interior Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6,Type 1 enclosure. D. Obstruction Detection Device: Provide each motorized door with self-monitoring, four-wire-configured- type, electrically actuated, external automatic safety sensor able to protect full width of door opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. E. Adjustable Limit Switches: Interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install door,track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,jamb and head mold strips,anchors,inserts,hangers,and equipment supports. SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 13117 SECTION 08 3613-4 PERMIT SET 11.08 13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS B. Fasten vertical track assembly to framing at not less than 24 inches (600 mm)o.c. Hang horizontal track from structural overhead framing with angle or channel hangers welded and bolt fastened in place. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment. C. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate,and maintain doors. END OF SECTION SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 13117 SECTION 08 36 13-5 PERMIT SET 11.08 13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior manual-swing aluminum doors. 2. Exterior aluminum-framed storefront windows. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure,the effects of the following: 1. Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements. 3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including,but not limited to,story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 5. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements,to glazing. d. Glazing-to-glazing contact. e. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners,attachments,and other components. g. Sealant failure. h. Failure of operating units to function properly. B. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads:As indicated on Drawings. 2. Seismic Loads:As indicated on Drawings. C. Deflection of Framing Members Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches(4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch(6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches(4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch(19 mm), whichever is less. D. Structural-Test Performance: Systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 13117 SECTION 08 41 13- 1 PERMIT sar 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds. E. Temperature Change (Range): Systems accommodate 120 deg F(67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F(100 deg C),material surfaces. F. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of systems of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft.(0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq.ft.(300 Pa). G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Systems do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 8psf. H. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas of systems have condensation-resistance factor(CRF)of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503. I. Average Thermal Conductance: Fixed glazing and framing areas of systems have average U-factor of not more than 0.61 Btu/sq. ft.x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations,sections,details,and attachments to other work. 1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities,and locations. C. Samples: For each exposed finish. D. Product test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer and capable of preparation of data for aluminum- framed systems including Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Structural failures including,but not limited to,excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals,metal finishes,and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components to function properly. 2. Warranty Period:Two years from date of Substantial Completion. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 13117 SECTION 08 41 13-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which fmishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for aluminum-framed systems is based on `TriFab 451T' by Kawneer Company, Inc. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. TC470';Arcadia,Inc. 2. `450-TOS';Cascade Aluminum. 3. `FT451';CRL/US Aluminum. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Abiminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and fmish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209(ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars,Rods,Profiles,and Tubes: ASTM B 221(ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer. 1. Structural Shapes,Plates,and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 2.3 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section"Glass and Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. 2.4 DOORS A. Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors,for manual swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4(44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.188-inch-(4.8-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 2. Door Design:Medium stile;3-1/2-inch(88.9-mm)nominal width. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 13117 SECTION 08 41 13-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets:Beveled,snap-on,extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. B. Door Hardware: As specified below and in Division 08 Section"Finish Hardware." 2.5 DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide heavy-duty units in sizes and types recommended by entrance system and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. 1. See Division 08 Section"Door Hardware"for balance of hardware. B. Continuous-Gear Hinges: Extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves joined by a continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap;with concealed,self-lubricating thrust bearings. 1. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Select Products Limited. 2. Color: Match aluminum storefront. C. Cylinders: As specified in Division 08 Section"Finish Hardware." D. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing. E. Closers: BHMA A156.4,Grade 1,with accessories required for a complete installation,sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force. F. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000,molded neoprene,or ASTM D 2287,molded PVC. 2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701,made of wool,polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing. G. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip. H. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch(12.7 mm). I. Silencers: BHMA A156.16,Grade 1. 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Insulating Materials: As specified in Division 07 Section"Building Insulation." B. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants." C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos,formulated for 30-mil(0.762-mm)thickness per coat. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp,straight,and free of defects or deformations. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 13117 SECTION 08 41 13-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing(without projecting stops). E. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing hardware. 1. At exterior doors,provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. F. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors,provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors,provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. G. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes. H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. 1. Color and Gloss: To be selected. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 2. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 3. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 4. Seal joints watertight,unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals,protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 13117 SECTION 08 41 13-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants"and to produce weathertight installation. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades,without warp or rack. F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section"Glass and Glazing." G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight closure. 2. Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface-mounted hardware according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. H. Install insulation materials as specified in Division 07 Section"Building Insulation." I. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation. J. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet(3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch(6 mm)over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line,limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch(1.5 mm). b. Where surfaces meet at corners,limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch(0.8 mm). 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch(3 mm). END OF SECTION ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 13117 SECTION 08 41 13-6 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON UNIT SKYLIGHTS PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Unit skylights mounted on site-erected curbs. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of unit skylight. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes for unit skylights. B. Shop Drawings: For unit skylight work. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and connections to supporting structure and other adjoining work. C. Aluminum and Glazing Panel Finish Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, in a representative section of each unit skylight in manufacturer's standard size. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. F. Maintenance Data: For unit skylights to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating unit skylights that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels,test reports,and calculations. B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to unit skylight manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of unit skylights that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Uncontrolled water leakage. UNIT SKYLIGHTS 13117 SECTION 08 62 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON UNIT SKYLIGHTS b. Deterioration of metals,metal finishes,and other materials beyond normal weathering. c. Yellowing of acrylic glazing. d. Breakage of polycarbonate glazing. e. Deterioration of insulating-glass hermetic seal. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide`S-Line' by Kalwall. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum U-factor of 0.30 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (1.71 W/sq.m x K). B. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient(SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum SHGC of 0.35. 2.3 UNIT SKYLIGHTS A. General: Provide factory-assembled unit skylights that include glazing, extruded-aluminum glazing retainers, gaskets, and inner frames and that are capable of withstanding performance requirements indicated. B. Unit Shape and Size: Rectangular,nominal 2'-0"x 12'-0". C. Fiberglass-Sandwich-Panel Glazing: Manufacturer's standard with uniformly colored, translucent, fiberglass-reinforced-polymer face sheets permanently adhered to a grid core. 1. Thickness: 2-3/4". 2. Exterior Color: Crystal. 3. Interior Color: Crystal. 4. Color Stability: Full thickness of the exterior face sheet shall not change color more than 3 CIE Units DELTA E by ASTM D 2244 after 5 years outdoor South Florida weathering at 5° facing south,determined by the average of at least three white samples with and without a protective film or coating to ensure long-term color stability. Color stability shall be unaffected by abrasion or scratching D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard. E. Condensation Control: Fabricate unit skylights with integral internal gutters and nonclogging weeps to collect and drain condensation to the exterior. 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Same metal as metal being fastened,nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners to match material being fastened. 1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners might allow access to building, provide nonremovable fastener heads. UNIT SKYLIGHTS 13117 SECTION 08 62 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON UNIT SKYLIGHTS B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Mill Finish: Manufacturer's standard. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installation of unit skylight with installation of substrates, vapor retarders, roof insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. B. Comply with recommendations in AAMA 1607 and with manufacturer's written instructions for installing unit skylights. C. Install unit skylights level,plumb,and true to line,without distortion. D. Anchor unit skylights securely to supporting substrates. E. Where aluminum surfaces of unit skylights will contact another metal or corrosive substrates, such as preservative-treated wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces or provide other approved permanent separation recommended in writing by unit skylight manufacturer. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean exposed unit skylight surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings and finishes. B. Remove excess sealants,glazing materials,dirt,and other substances. C. Remove and replace glazing that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. D. Protect unit skylight surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. END OF SECTION UNIT SKYLIGHTS 13117 SECTION 08 62 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes items known commercially as fmish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding,and folding doors,except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. B. This Section includes the following: 1. Hinges. 2. Lock cylinders and keys. 3. Bolts. 4. Closers. 5. Push/pull units. 6. Protection plates. 7. Miscellaneous door control devices. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections. B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish,and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. Schedule shall be typewritten on 8 '/2" x 11" paper. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type,style,function,size,and fmish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations,symbols,and codes contained in schedule. f. Opening description for door,mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule. DOOR HARDWARE 13117 SECTION 08 71 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON DOOR HARDWARE D. Templates for doors, frames,and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers,etc.) from a single manufacturer. B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier,with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor,at reasonable times during the course of the Work,for consultation. 1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Packaging of door hardware,on a set by set basis, is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers,sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container. B. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. C. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment,maintenance,and removal and replacement of door hardware. 1.7 WARRANTY Provide warranty that all items furnished under this section of the specifications shall be free of defects in material and workmanship and shall perform the services for which it was intended for a period of one(1)year(door closers,ten(10)years)after substantial completion. Replace,repair or adjust any item not fulfilling this warranty at no further expense to owner. DOOR HARDWARE 13117 SECTION 08 71 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON DOOR HARDWARE PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: 1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations indicated. B. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws,except as specifically indicated. C. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed(exposed under any condition)screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work,to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint"surfaces to receive painted finish. D. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work,provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 2.3 HINGES,BUTTS AND PIVOTS A. Provide ball or plain bearing,square corners,bull mortise hinges at all locations unless noted otherwise. B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements: 1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated,provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Out-Swing Exterior Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins. D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or less in height with same rule for additional hinges. DOOR HARDWARE 13117 SECTION 08 71 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON DOOR HARDWARE 2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Equip locks with manufacturer's 5-pin tumbler, interchangeable core cylinders with construction keying. B. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze,stainless steel,or nickel silver. 2.5 LOCKS,LATCHES AND BOLTS A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt,with curved lip extended to protect frame,finished to match hardware set,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide flat lip strikes for locks with 3-piece, antifriction latchbolts as recommended by manufacturer. B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8-inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. C. Locks: Provide locks and cylinders prepared for interchangeable cores. 2.6 PUSH/PULL UNITS A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation; through-bolted for matched pairs,but not for single units. 2.7 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated,comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door,exposure to weather,and anticipated frequency of use.Use surface mounted flat rectangular type with cover,adjustable arm type. B. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped,provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. 2.8 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS A. General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and smoke or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. C. Weatherstripping at Heads: Provide silicone seal pressure-sensitive bulb-type door gasketing. 2.9 KICK PLATES AND ARMOR PLATES A. Kick Plates and Armor Plates: Self-tapping screws for steel doors,height as scheduled,width 2 inches less than nominal door width,edges beveled. 2.10 HARDWARE FINISHES A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets(or push- pull units if no latch or lock sets). DOOR HARDWARE 13117 SECTION 08 71 00-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON DOOR HARDWARE B. Provide BHMA,626 dull chromium-plated,or 630 dull stainless steel on exposed hardware metal surfaces except where indicated otherwise in hardware groups. C. Provide quality of fmish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any),composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. D. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry- recognized standard commercial finishes,except as otherwise noted. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect. 1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Section 09 91 00. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. C. Set units level,plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 07900. F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. 3.2 ADJUSTING,CLEANING,AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. DOOR HARDWARE 13117 SECTION 08 71 00-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON DOOR HARDWARE D. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the Installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and of door control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the following work: 1. Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. 3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units. 4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware. 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section"Door Hardware," hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule,and in the following schedule of hardware sets. 1. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item,manufacturer and product designation,size, and fmish or color,as applicable. 2. Hardware sets indicate quantity,item,ANSI designation,size,and finish or color,as applicable. B. MANUFACTURERS 1. Butts: McKinney. 2. Locks and Latches: Schlage. 3. Deadbolts: Schlage. 4. Magnetic Locks: Schlage. 5. Cylinders: Schlage. 6. Push/Pull Units: Trimco. 7. Touch-Sense Push: Securitron. 8. Closers: LCN. 9. Protection Plates: Trimco. 10. Stops: Ives. 11. Overhead Stops: Glynn-Johnson. 12. Threshold/Weatherstrip: Pemko. C. HARDWARE SCHEDULE Group 1: Quantity Description Manuf.# Finish 1.5 pr. Butt Hinges TA714 4.5x4.5 652 1 ea. Lockset D80-RHO 626 1 ea. Closer 4040-CUSH 689 1 ea. Stop 407 1/2 630 DOOR HARDWARE 13117 SECTION 08 71 00-6 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON DOOR HARDWARE Group 2: Entry Door Quantity Description Manuf.# Finish 1 ea. Exit Device EL35A-Lx360L 1 ea. Rim Cylinder Balance of Hardware by Door Manufacturer Group 3: Entry Doors,Pair Quantity Description Manuf # Finish 2 ea. Magnetic Lock M450 2 ea. Deadlock L462(Mount at bottom rail) 2 ea. Touch-Sense Push TSB 630 2 ea. Pull 1191-4 630 Balance of Hardware by Door Manufacturer Group 4: Ouantitv Description Manuf.# Finish 1.5 pr. Butt Hinges TA714 4.5x4.5 NRP 652 1 ea. Lockset ND8O-RHO 626 1 ea. Closer 4040 689 1 ea. Kickplate 30"x 2"LDW 630 1 ea. Stop 407 1/2 630 1 ea. Threshold 2001-T 1 ea. Bottom Sweep 3452 1 set Gasket S88D Group 5: Quantity Description Manuf. # Finish 3 pr. Butt Hinges TA714 4.5x4.5 NRP 652 1 ea. Lockset ND8O-RHO 626 1 set Flush Bolts 262 T&B 626 1 ea. Dustproof Strike DP2 626 1 ea. Floor Stop 407 1/2 630 1 ea. OH Stop 70H END OF SECTION DOOR HARDWARE 13117 SECTION 08 71 00-7 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Aluminum entrances and storefront. B. Related Sections:The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1. Division 08 Section"Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefront." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Deterioration of Coated Glass:Defects developed from normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process. 1. Excludes defects attributed to glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's directions. 2. Defects include peeling,cracking,and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. B. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use due to causes other than glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining,and cleaning insulating glass. 1. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust,moisture, or film on the interior surfaces of glass. C. Normal Thermal Movement: Movement resulting from an ambient temperature range of 120 deg. F and from a consequent temperature range within glass and glass framing members of 180 deg.F 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General:Provide glazing systems that are produced,fabricated,and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading(where applicable),without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to: 1. Defective manufacture,fabrication,and installation. 2. Failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight. 3. Deterioration of glazing materials. 4. Other defects in construction. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated,including instructions for installation and maintenance. GLASS AND GLAZING 13117 SECTION 08 80 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GLASS AND GLAZING B. Samples for Verification Purposes: 1. 12-inch-square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products. 2. 12-inch-long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. 3. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. C. Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass,provided labels represent a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 01. F. Shop Drawings: Interior glass location drawings showing locations of all interior glass types. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Industry Standards: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below,except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. FGMA(Flat Glass Marketing Association): "FGMA Glazing Manual." 2. LSGA(Laminated Safety Glass Association): "LSGA Design Guide." 3. SIGMA (Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association): TM-3000 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines". B. Safety Glass: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of Insulating Glass Certification Council(IGCC). D. Single-Source Responsibility for Glass: Provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each type of glass indicated,and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type and class required. E. Single-Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. F. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, altitude changes,or other causes. GLASS AND GLAZING 13117 SECTION 08 80 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GLASS AND GLAZING 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain,frost,condensation,or other causes. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Warranty on Coated Glass Products: Submit written warranty signed by coated glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Defmitions" article, fo.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling,installing, and cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. 2. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling,installing, protecting,and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. 2. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS,GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. B. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data,based on procedures indicated below: 1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program,expressed as Btu/sq.ft.x h x deg F(W/sq.m x K). 2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values,according to NFRC 300. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: GLASS AND GLAZING 13117 SECTION 08 80 00-3 Puu1rrSEr 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GLASS AND GLAZING B. Manufacturers of Clear Float Glass: 1. Guardian Industries,Inc. 2. Pilkington North America Inc. 3. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. 4. PPG Industries,Inc. C. Manufacturers of Heat-Treated Glass: 1. Guardian Industries,Inc. 2. Pilkington North America Inc. 3. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. 4. PPG Industries,Inc. D. Manufacturers of Insulating Glass: 1. Guardian Industries,Inc. 2. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. 3. PPG Industries,Inc. 4. Viracon,Inc. 2.3 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS A. Flat,Clear Float Glass: 1. ASTM C 1036,Type I(transparent glass,flat),Class 1 (clear),Quality g3(glazing select). a. Thickness: 1/4". b. No tong marks. 2.4 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. General:Limit localized roll wave distortion to 0.005"or less. B. Uncoated,Clear,Heat-Treated Float Glass: 1. ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated), Type I (transparent flat), Class I (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select),Kind FT(fully tempered). 2. Thickness: As indicated or,if not indicated, 1/4-inch. C. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition B, Type I, Quality-Q3, and complying with other requirements specified. 4. Glass: Clear float. 5. Ceramic Coating Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units,General: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other requirements indicated. GLASS AND GLAZING 13117 SECTION 08 80 00-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GLASS AND GLAZING 1. For properties of individual glass lites making up units,refer to requirements specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types,classes,kinds,and conditions of glass products comprising lites of insulating glass units. 2. Provide heat-treated, float glass of kind indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, Kind HS (heat- strengthened) where recommended by manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements specified and Kind FT(fully tempered)where safety glass is designated or required. 3. Performance characteristics designated for coated insulating glass are nominal values based on manufacturer's published test data for units with lites 1/4-inch-thick and nominal 1/2-inch dehydrated space between lites. a. U-values are expressed as BTUs per hour per square foot per F degree difference. 4. Performance Characteristics: a. Classification:ASTM E 774,Class A. b. Thickness of Each Lite: 1/4 inch. c. Thickness of Air Space: 1/2 inch. d. Sealing System:Dual seal. e. Primary Sealant:Polyisobutylene. f. Secondary Sealant: Silicone. g. Sealant Tolerances: Alignment of primary seal with spacer material to vary 1/16 inch or less within 12 inches,to maximum 1/8 inch over length of glass unit. h. Spacer Material:Black anodized aluminum. i. Dessicant:Manufacturer's standard;either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both. j. Corner Construction:Manufacturer's standard. B. Flat,Low-E,Insulating Vision Glass: 1. Basis of Design: Solarban 60 Clear/Clear. 2. Exterior Lite:Clear float glass with low-E coating at No.2 face. 3. Interior Lite:Clear float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Visible Light Transmittance;69 percent. 6. U-Values:0.27 summer daytime;0.29 winter nighttime. 7. Shading Coefficient:0.44. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient(SGHC): 0.38. 9. Outdoor Reflectance: 11 percent. C. Flat,Insulating Spandrel Glass: 1. Exterior Lite:Clear float glass with low-E coating at No. 2 face;heat-treated as required. Comply with ASTM C 1376. 2. Interior Lite: Clear float glass with ceramic opacifier coating at No. 4 face; tempered as required. Condition C. a. Opacifier: Opaci-coat 300 opacifier,standard color to be selected. 2.6 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General:Provide products of type indicated,complying with the following requirements: GLASS AND GLAZING 13117 SECTION 08 80 00-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GLASS AND GLAZING 1. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with ASTM C 920. 2. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 3. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and conditions existing at time of installation. 4. Colors: As indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Two-Part Polysulfide Glazing Sealant: 1. Type: M. 2. Grade: NS. 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses: NT,M,G,A and O. 5. Available Product: Synthacalk GC-5 by Pecora. C. One-Part Acid-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: 1. Type: S. 2. Grade: NS. 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses: NT,G,A and O. 5. Available Products: a. 999-A by Dow Coming. b. 863 Silicone by Pecora. c. Proglaze by Tremco. D. One-Part Non-Acid Curing Low-Modulus Silicone Glazing Sealant: 1. Type: S. 2. Grade: NS. 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses: NT,G,A and O. 5. Tensile Strength: 45 psi or less at 100 percent elongation when tested per ASTM D 412 after 14 days at 77 F degrees and 50 percent relative humidity. 6. Available Products: a. 790 by Dow Coming. b. 864 Silicone by Pecora c. Spectrem 1 by Tremco. E. One-Part Non-Acid Curing Medium-Modulus Silicone Glazing Sealant: Use at all butt-glazed conditions. 1. Type: S. 2. Grade: NS. GLASS AND GLAZING 13117 SECTION 08 80 00-6 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GLASS AND GLAZING 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses: NT,G,A and O. 5. Tensile Strength: Not less than 45 psi or more than 75 psi at 100 percent elongation when tested per ASTM D 412 after 14 days at 77 F degrees and 50 percent relative humidity. 6. Available Products: a. 795 by Dow Corning. b. Spectrem 2 by Tremco. 2.7 GLAZING TAPES A. Preformed Butyl Sealant Tape: Complying with AAMA 804.4 and 804.7, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent, nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces, with or without spacer rod as recommended by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, packaged on rolls with a release paper backing. 1. Color: Black. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, glazing tape that may be incorporated in the Work includes,but is not limited to,the following: 1. Preformed Tape Without Spacer Rod(For lites up to 9 square feet): a. 440 II Tape by Tremco. b. Extru-Seal by Pecora. 2. Preformed Tape With Spacer Rod(For lites in excess of 9 square feet): a. PTI 303 Glazing Tape(with shim)by Protective Treatments,Inc. b. Pre-shimmed Tremco 440 Tape,Tremco,Inc. 2.8 GLAZING GASKETS A. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene, complying with ASTM C 509,Type II,black,and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to: 1. Advanced Elastomer Systems,L.P. 2. Schnee-Morehead,Inc. 3. Tremco,Inc. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated,and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners,Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM, or silicone blocks with Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5,and compatible with glazing sealants. GLASS AND GLAZING 13117 SECTION 08 80 00-7 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GLASS AND GLAZING D. Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM, or silicone blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated, and compatible with glazing sealants. E. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM, or silicone blocks of size and hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement(side-walking). F. Compressible Filler Rods: Closed-cell or waterproof-jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam,flexible and resilient,with 5-10 psi compression strength for 25 percent deflection. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine glass framing,with glazier present,for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances,including those for size,squareness,offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Obtain glazier's written report listing unsatisfactory conditions. C. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. 1. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates. 2. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated. B. Pre-Installation Meeting: .Prior to installation of Work of this Section, meet at Project site with glazier; sealant and gasket manufacturers technical representatives, glass framing erector, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects glass and glazing,to review procedures and schedule proposed for glazing and associated work. 3.3 GLAZING,GENERAL A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass,sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings are intended to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances,and adequate sealant thicknesses,with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows: 1. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. 2. Do not impact glass with metal framing. 3. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings;do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. 4. Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening,unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label. 5. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site. GLASS AND GLAZING 13117 SECTION 08 80 00-8 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GLASS AND GLAZING 6. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants,as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet. 1. Locate blocks one quarter of glass width from each corner,but with edge nearest corner not closer than 6 inches from corner,unless otherwise required. 2. Set blocks in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use. G. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches(length plus height)as follows: 1. Locate spacers inside,outside,and directly opposite each other. 2. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape,use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. 3. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern,draw,bow,and similar characteristics. I. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. J. Miter cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. K. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers,to accomplish the following: 1. Prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems. 2. Prevent sealant from adhering to back surfaces of joints. 3. Control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. L. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. M. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. B. Do not apply markers to glass surface. C. Remove nonpermanent labels,and clean surfaces. D. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter. If,despite such protection,contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. GLASS AND GLAZING 13117 SECTION 08 8000-9 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GLASS AND GLAZING E. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains,and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. F. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes,accidents and vandalism,during construction period. G. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION GLASS AND GLAZING 13117 SECTION 08 80 00- 10 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ELASTOMERIC FINISH SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections,apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Elastomeric fmish system applied over glass-mat gypsum sheathing at exterior soffits. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and component of elastomeric finish system indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, penetrations, terminations,joints, fasteners, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. D. Material or product certificates. E. Product test reports. F. Evaluation reports. G. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers. B. Source Limitations: Obtain elastomeric finish system from single source from single manufacturer and from sources approved by manufacturer as compatible with system components. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Dryvit Systems,Inc. 2. Sto Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide fasteners, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and with substrates and approved for use by elastomeric finish system manufacturer. B. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other elastomeric fmish system materials;complying with ASTM D 578 and the following: 1. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.3 oz./sq.yd.. ELASTOMERIC FINISH SYSTEM 13117 SECTION 09 25 13- 1 PERMIT SET 1108.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ELASTOMERIC FINISH SYSTEM C. Base-Coat Materials: Standard formulation. D. Finish-Coat Materials: Factory-mixed, water-based air-curing acrylic-based coating with enhanced mildew resistance. 1. Color: To match MP-2 metal panels. 2. Texture: Fine sand finish. E. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments,and fastener suitable for substrate. F. Trim Accessories: Aluminum reglet trim,continuous pieces. 1. Channel Reveal: DCS-50-50,by Fry Reglet. 2. L-Trim: DRML-50,by Fry Reglet. 3. T-Molding: TDM-50-50,by Fry Reglet. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 1397 and elastomeric finish system manufacturer's written instructions for installation of elastomeric finish system as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. B. Trim: Apply trim accessories at locations indicated on Drawings. C. Base Coat: Apply to sheathing in minimum thickness recommended in writing by elastomeric finish system manufacturer,but not less than 1/16-inch(1.6-mm)dry-coat thickness. D. Reinforcing Mesh: Completely embed mesh strips in wet base coat, applying additional base-coat material if necessary,so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible. 1. Strip reinforcing mesh at sheathing joints. E. Finish Coat: Apply over dry base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by elastomeric finish system manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints,shadow lines,and texture variations. 1. Total System Thickness: Approximately 3/16". END OF SECTION ELASTOMERIC FINISH SYSTEM 13117 SECTION 09 25 13-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Non-load-bearing steel framing. B. Drawings indicate design intent for heights,profiles and elevations of walls, soffits and ceilings; framing systems to be designed by installer. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the products specified. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING A. Steel Framing,General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Metal complying with ASTM C 645 requirements. a. Protective Coating: 1) Interior Applications: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 13117 SECTION 09 29 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 2) Exterior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M,Z180(G60),hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Partition and Soffit Framing: 1. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645,in depth indicated. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.45 mm(0.0179 inch),unless otherwise indicated. 2. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 50.8-mm-(2-inch-)deep flanges. 3. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.79 mm(0.0312 inch),unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 1.37-mm(0.0538-inch)bare steel thickness,with minimum 12.7- mm-(1/2-inch-)wide flange,and in depth indicated. a. Clip Angle: 38.1 by 38.1 mm (1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch), 1.73-mm- (0.068-inch-) thick, galvanized steel. 5. Hat-Shaped,Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645,in depth indicated. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.45 mm(0.0179 inch),unless otherwise indicated. 6. Resilient Furring Channels: 12.7-mm- (1/2-inch-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. Asymmetrical or hat shaped,with face attached to single flange by a slotted leg(web)or attached to two flanges by slotted or expanded metal legs. 7. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 1.37-mm(0.0538-inch)bare steel thickness,with minimum 12.7- mm-(1/2-inch-)wide flange,and in depth indicated. a. Furring Brackets: Adjustable,corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.79 mm(0.0312 inch). b. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.59-mm- (0.0625- inch-)diameter wire,or double strand of 1.21-mm-(0.0475-inch-)diameter wire. 8. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Panel Size,General: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 36. 1. Type X: 5/8"thickness,with long edges tapered. C. Sag-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 36,manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board, 12.7 mm(1/2 inch)thick,and with long edges tapered. Apply on ceiling surfaces. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 13117 SECTION 09 29 00-2 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Comerbead: Use at outside corners,unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U-Bead: Use where indicated. 5. Expansion(Control)Joint: Use where indicated. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475;maximum V.O.C. content of joint compound to be 20 g/L. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints,rounded or beveled edges,and damaged surface areas,use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, flanges of trim accessories, and fasteners, use setting-type taping compound or drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second and finish coats, use setting-type, sandable topping compound or drying- type,all-purpose compound. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.84 to 2.84 mm(0.033 to 0.112 inch)thick. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754,and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Partition and Soffit Framing: 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and wall. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 13117 SECTION 09 29 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 2. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 3. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb,unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. 4. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings,unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3.2 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. 1. Space screws a maximum of 304.8 mm(12 inches)o.c. for vertical applications. 2. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 203.2 mm(8 inches)o.c. 3. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing,unless otherwise indicated. 4. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly,and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. 5. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 6. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3.3 FINISHING A. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise,attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Finishing Gypsum Board Panels: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,fastener heads,surface defects,and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. 1. Prefill open joints,rounded or beveled edges,] and damaged surface areas. 2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints,except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. C. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 13117 SECTION 09 29 00-4 PERMrr SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile and where indicated. 3. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 13117 SECTION 09 29 00-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fiberglass-reinforced wall panels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Samples: Submit 6 inch x 6 inch minimum sample panels and 6 inch minimum length inside corner and edge trim samples. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver panels in manufacturer's protective packaging. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store panels in covered area. 2. Protect panels from moisture or sunlight exposure. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to the following: 1. 'General Purpose Liner Panel,'Glasteel. 2. 'Glasbord-P,'Kemlite Co. 3. "FRP',Panolam Industries. 4. '1200 Standard,'Structoglas. 2.2 PANELS A. Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin panels: 1. Thickness: 0.09 inch. 2. Panel Length: As required for floor to ceiling panels. 3. Panel Width: 4 feet. 4. Texture: Smooth. 5. Color: White,as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 6. Fire Rating: Class III,flame spread less than 200. FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PANELS 13117 SECTION 09 77 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11 08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PANELS 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Panel Moldings: 1. Molding Type: One-and two-piece PVC moldings for divider,edge cap,outside corner and inside corner. 2. Molding Length: 8 and 10 feet. 3. Color: Match polyester resin panels. 4. Acceptable Moldings: Manufacturer's standard PVC moldings. B. Panel Molding Sealants: 1. Silicone Rubber Sealant: USDA-approved clear silicone as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Use sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,Subpart D(EPA Method 24): a. Architectural Sealants: Not more than 250 g/L. C. Adhesive: VOC-compliant type as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Inspect wall surfaces for flatness,dryness,and cleanliness. Verify wall is flat within 1/8"over 10'. B. Report any discrepancies to General Contractor for correction. C. Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. Commencement of work shall constitute acceptance of conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PANELS A. Cut panels to required size with carbide-tipped saw. B. Pre-drill panels for fasteners. C. Apply adhesive to substrate and back of panel as recommended by manufacturer. D. Apply panels to wall,leaving 1/8"clearance at edges. E. Install fasteners at 18"on center at panel edges. 1. Space fasteners 3/8" from edge of panel to center of fastener. F. Install PVC moldings at butt joints,edges,outside and inside corners. 1. Apply silicone rubber sealant to panel joints. 3.3 COMPLETION AND CLEANING A. Replace damaged and defective panels and molding. B. Final Cleaning: 1. Clean panels and moldings upon completion of work. FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PANELS 13117 SECTION 09 77 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PANELS 2. Remove surplus materials,rubbish,and debris resulting from panel installation upon completion of work,and leave areas of installation in neat,clean condition. END OF SECTION FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PANELS 13117 SECTION 09 77 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed interior items and surfaces. B. Paint all surfaces exposed to view and to weather, except where a surface or material is indicated not to be painted,to remain natural,or to receive special coating. 1. Where no indication is made for an item or a surface exposed to view or weather,paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. 2. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 3. "Exposed to view" includes structure, mechanical and electrical components, hardware, miscellaneous supports and fasteners that may be visible behind or through perforated materials, grillwork,reveals,and other surface finishes that intentionally have gaps. C. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers,exposed steel and iron work,and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. D. Do not paint prefimished items, concealed surfaces, fmished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels, unless otherwise noted. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Acoustical wall or ceiling panels. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. c. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces include wall or ceiling surfaces not exposed to view in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Furred areas. b. Ceiling plenums. c. Pipe spaces. d. Duct shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper,except exposed copper drain leaders. e. Bronze. f. Brass. 4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment such as: PAINTING 13117 SECTION 09 91 00- 1 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PAINTING a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories(UL), Factory Mutual(FM),or other code- required labels or equipment name,identification,performance rating,or nomenclature plates. E. Unless otherwise noted,items with factory-applied prime coat are not considered"prefmished". Apply to these a minimum of two additional coats of paint at the job site. Surface preparation,priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. F. VOC Compliance: Select painting materials, including fillers, primers, finishes, and solvents compliant with Oregon Administrative Rules,Division 22,regulating VOC emissions. G. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section"LEED-HC Requirements." 2. Division 06 Sections for shop priming interior architectural woodwork. 3. Division 09 Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies"for surface preparation for gypsum board. 4. Divisions 23 and 26: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 23 and 26,respectively. H. Applicable LEED Credits: 1. Credit IEQc4.2—Paints and Coatings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. "Paint" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers, and fillers, and other applied materials used as prime,intermediate,or finish coats. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling,storing,and applying each coating material proposed for use. 1. List each material,and cross-reference specific coating system and application. 2. Identify each material by manufacturer's brand name,catalog number and general classification. B. LEED Documentation: 1. Credit IEQc4, Group 2 - Low-Emitting Materials, Finishes; refer to Division 01 Section"LEED- HC Requirements." 2. Credit IEQc4.2—Paints and Coatings LEED Product Information Form and Product Sheets;refer to Division 01 Section"LEED-HC Requirements". C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available. for each type of fmish-coat material indicated. D. Samples for Verification: Complete finish system, including fillers and primers, to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions,on representative samples of the actual substrates listed below. PAINTING 13117 SECTION 09 91 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PAINTING 1. Resubmit until required sheen,color,and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers,primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the fmish coats. B. Coordination: Ensure compatibility of finish materials specified in this Section with primers specified in other sections. 1. Notify the Architect of potential incompatibility. 2. On request,furnish technical data on compatible finish materials C. Field Samples: Provide a full-coat fmish sample on wall surfaces, exterior and interior components selected by Architect. 1. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft.of wall surface. b. Small Areas and Items: The Architect will designate an item or area as required. 2. Simulate finished lighting conditions in spaces selected for field sample. 3. Apply coatings according to the Schedule or as specified. 4. Provide required sheen,color,and texture on each surface. 5. Final approval of colors will be from field samples. 6. After finishes are accepted,the Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. D. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best quality trade sale material for all coating systems. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label,and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description(generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture,with a key to manufacturer's batch codes. 4. Volatile solvent content by weight. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. Federal Specification number,if applicable. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. PAINTING 13117 SECTION 09 91 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PAINTING 1. Bring materials stored at or near the minimum allowed temperature to recommended ambient application temperature before application. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog,or mist; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent except if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. D. Do not apply paint to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work are: 1. Benjamin Moore. 2. Coronado Paint. 3. Miller Paint Co. 4. Rodda Paint Co. 5. Sherwin Williams. B. Substitute Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request prior to bid date in accordance with requirements of Division 01 Section"Product Substitutions". C. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products named are required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers,primers,and fmish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint- material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. C. V.O.C.Content: 1. Provide materials for exterior application with V.O.C.content not exceeding 200 g/l. 2. Unless noted otherwise, provide materials for interior application with V.O.C. content not exceeding 50 g/l. 3. V.O.C.content of epoxy coating not to exceed 150 g/l. 2.3 COLORS A. Colors will be confirmed by Architect after approval of finishes from field samples. PAINTING 13117 SECTION 09 91 00-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PAINTING 2.4 PREPARATORY COATS A. Interior Primer: Interior latex-based or alkyd primer of fmish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with fmish coat and on substrate indicated. 1. Ferrous-Metal Substrates: Quick drying,rust-inhibitive metal primer. 2. Zinc-Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer. 3. At Epoxy Coating:Acrylic primer. 4. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate indicated, use paint specified for finish coat. 2.5 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS A. Exterior Latex(Flat): 1. Benjamin Moore;Ben 100%Acrylic Exterior Flat Finish. 2. Coronado:Coronado Supreme Latex Flat House Paint. 3. Miller;Kril 100%Acrylic Exterior Flat. 4. Rodda; AC-911 Exterior Velvet Flat. 5. Sherwin-Williams;A100 Exterior Latex Flat. 2.6 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: 6. Benjamin Moore;536 Ultra Spec 500 Interior Flat. 7. Coronado: 1226 Air-Care Acrylic Low Odor Flat Paint. 8. Miller;Acro Latex Flat 6450. 9. Rodda; Horizon Flat Interior Wall Paint. 10. Sherwin-Williams;Harmony Interior Latex Flat B5 Series. B. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: 1. Benjamin Moore;N537 Ultra Spec 500 Low-Sheen Interior Wall Paint. 2. Coronado: 1230 Line Air Care Acrylic Eggshell Enamel. 3. Miller;Acro Solvent Free Latex Eggshell 4650. 4. Rodda; Horizon Low-Gloss Interior Wall Paint. 5. Sherwin-Williams;Harmony Interior Latex Eg-Shel B9 Series. C. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 1. Benjamin Moore;N539 Ultra Spec 500 Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel 2. Coronado: 926 Air-Care Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel 3. Miller;Acro Solvent Free Latex Semi-Gloss 2850. 4. Rodda; Horizon Semi-Gloss Interior Wall Paint. 5. Sherwin-Williams;Harmony Interior Latex Semi-Gloss B10 Series. D. Semigloss Epoxy: 1. Benjamin Moore;P42-84 Super Spec HP Waterborne Epoxy 2. Coronado;Corotech V440 Waterborne Amine Epoxy PAINTING 13117 SECTION 09 91 00-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PAINTING 3. Miller;Waterborne Epoxy 2650. 4. Rodda; 70503 EcoLogic Waterborne Epoxy. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND GENERAL PREPARATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 3. Painter's Responsibility for Inspection: The coating sub-contractor is required to inspect surfaces prior to paint application n accordance with PDCA Standard P4-94, "Responsibilities for Inspection and Acceptance of Surfaces Prior to Painting and Decorating". If any surfaces are not satisfactorily prepared by others,the coating sub-contractor is to notify Contractor immediately. B. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. 1. If removal is impractical or impossible, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 2. After completing painting operations in each space or area,reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. C. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use only clean containers for mixing and applying paint. 2. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. D. Tinting: Where multiple coats are used,tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat,but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments,clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet,newly painted surfaces. 2. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition. B. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. C. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated. 1. Remove oil,grease,dirt,loose mill scale,and other foreign substances. PAINTING 13117 SECTION 09 91 00-6 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PAINTING 2. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's(SSPC)recommendations. 3. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer,and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 4. Verify that ferrous metal article to be painted is Work of this Section;and is not work of Division 09 Section"High-Performance Coatings". E. Aluminum: Prepare oxidized areas using deoxidizer per manufacturer's recommendations. F. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces per SSPC-SP1. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Paint colors,surface treatments,and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt,rust, scale, grease,moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term"exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the fmal installation of equipment,paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat,nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops,bottoms,and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. a. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. b. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions,sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish,color,and appearance. 4. Ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 5. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb PAINTING 13117 SECTION 09 91 00-7 PERMIT SET 1 LD8.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PAINTING pressure,and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush,roller,spray,or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in occupied spaces,or as otherwise indicated. F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat recommended by the manufacturer to items or surfaces required to be painted that have not been prime coated by others. 1. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears,to ensure a fmish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,runs,sags,ropiness,or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to have paint materials tested by any means deemed appropriate,invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during painting operations. 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The list of tests which the Owner may choose to have run during the course of Work includes,but is not limited to,the following: a. D562 Consistency of Paints Using Stormer Viscometer. b. D1210 Fineness of Dispersion of Pigment-Vehicle Systems. c. D1475 Density of Paint,Varnish Lacquer and Related Products. d. D2369 Volatile Content of Paints. e. D2371 Pigment Content of Solvent-Reducible Paints. f. D1729 Visual Evaluation of Color Differences of Opaque Materials. g. D2244 Calculation of Color Differences From Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. h. D523 Specular Gloss. i. D4449 Visual Evaluation of Gloss Differences between Surfaces of Similar Appearance. j. D2805 Hiding Power of Paint by Reflectometry. k. D2248 Detergent Resistance of Organic Finishes. 1. D3450 Washability Properties of Interior Architectural Coatings. m. D4064 Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by The Tabor Abraser. n. B117 Salt Spray(Fog)Testing. o. D822 Light and Water Exposure Apparatus (Carbon Arc Type) for Testing Paint, Varnish,Lacquers and Related Products. PAINTING 13117 SECTION 09 91 00-8 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PAINTING p. D3456 Determining by Exterior Exposure Tests the Susceptibility of Paint Films to Microbiological Attack. 3. If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing,and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary,the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint,the 2 coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades,whether being painted or not,against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning,repairing or replacing,and repainting,as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. C. At completion of construction activities of other trades,touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Exterior Soffits: 1. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. 2. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. 3. Topcoat: Exterior latex(flat). 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board Walls: 1. One coat PVA primer. 2. Two coats latex emulsion,eggshell fmish. 3. Color: As scheduled. B. Gypsum Board Walls Scheduled to Receive Epoxy Finish: 1. Primer: Interior acrylic primer. 5. Finish Coats: Interior semi-gloss waterborne epoxy coating. 3. Color: As scheduled. C. Gypsum Board Ceilings: 1. One coat PVA primer. 2. Two coats latex emulsion,flat finish. PAINTING 13117 SECTION 09 91 00-9 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON PAINTING 3. Color: As scheduled. D. Gypsum Board at Wood Panel Reveals: 1. One coat PVA primer. 2. Two coats latex emulsion,semi-gloss finish. 3. Color: As scheduled. E. Steel Doors and Frames(Factory Primed): 1. Includes Steel Door and Frames and Access Doors. 2. Two coats alkyd enamel,semi-gloss finish. 3. Work of this Section includes caulking and finishing line between frames and adjacent finished surfaces. F. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: 1. Two coats alkyd enamel,spray-applied,semi-gloss finish. 2. Color: Match adjacent wall. G. Access Doors(not receiving gypsum board): 1. Two coats alkyd enamel. 2. Gloss and color to match adjacent finish. END OF SECTION PAINTING 13117 SECTION 09 91 00- 10 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes applying steel coating systems to items and surfaces scheduled, including surface preparation,primer coats,intermediate coats(where applicable),and finish coats. B. Types of steel coating systems required for the Project include the following: 1. Pigmented, water-based, low-VOC acrylic polymer coating for exterior use on Existing Door, Metal Roof and Miscellaneous Exterior Steel,including new overhead sectional door and existing exposed wall panels,flashing and trim,copings and downspouts. 2. Pigmented,aliphatic,polyurethane-enamel finishes for exterior use at Exterior Steel Handrails. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section"Metal Fabrications." 2. Division 09 Section"Painting." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each element of each coating system specified(including surface preparation). 1. Provide the manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling,storing,and applying each material proposed for use. 2. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's brand name,catalog number and general classification. B. Certification: Manufacturer of each coating material must certify that material is compatible with substrate(s),and all other coating materials used in each complete coating system. 1. Certification must be included in product submittal, and be approved by the Architect prior to commencing coating application. C. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's custom color chips to match specified custom colors. 1. After initial custom color chips are approved by Architect, furnish custom color chips for all surfaces to be coated. D. Samples for Verification Purposes:Provide samples of each color and material to be applied with texture to simulate actual conditions on representative samples of the actual substrate, with the actual surface preparation. 1. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until the required sheen, color,and textures are achieved. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 13117 SECTION 09 96 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 2. Provide a list of materials and application method(including surface preparation) for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to project location and application. 3. Submit samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only. a. Steel: Provide two 12-inch-square samples for each applicable coating,color and finish. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator that has successfully completed coating system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project. B. Thinners:Use only thinners recommended by the manufacturer and only within recommended limits. C. Arrange a pre-installation conference for coating systems prior to the ordering of any coating materials, and prior to commencing any coating work. 1. Include the following at the pre-installation conference for pigmented acrylic polymer coating systems: a. Coating materials supplier. b. Substrate preparer(s). c. Coating materials installer. d. Other participants required by Division 01 Section"Project Meetings". D. Testing: Coating thickness shall be measured as follows: 1. Wet Film Thickness of Newly Applied Paint: ASTM D4414, "Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch Gages". 2. Dry Film Thickness of Coatings: SSPC-PA2, "Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages." E. Mockups: Apply 3'x 5'mockup of coating system indicated at existing metal roof. 1. Sample Testing: Coating manufacturer's representative shall perform ASTM D3359 adhesion test to verify quality of surface preparation and adhesion of coating. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, new, unopened packages, and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label,and the following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Product description(generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture,with a key to manufacturer's batch codes. 4. Volatile solvent content by weight. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. Handling instructions and precautions. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at minimum ambient temperature recommended by coatings manufacturer;but in no case less than 45 deg F. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 13117 SECTION 09 96 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 1. Bring materials stored at or near the minimum allowed temperature to recommended ambient application temperature before application. C. Maintain containers in storage in a clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when the temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are within maximum range recommended by coating system manufacturer. B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg.F above the dew point;or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Allow wet surfaces to thy thoroughly and attain the temperature and conditions specified before proceeding with or continuing the coating operation. 2. Work may continue during inclement weather only if areas and surfaces to be coated are enclosed and the temperature and humidity within the area can be maintained within limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.7 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide 2 gallons of each color of each type of coating specified,for Owner's maintenance use. B. Label each container with manufacturer's name, product number, color number, and room names and numbers where used. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL COATING MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, intermediate coat materials, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated, under the conditions of service and application indicated, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide the highest grade of the various coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable coating manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a best-grade product are not acceptable. C. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other approved manufacturers listed below. D. VOC Compliance: Select coating materials, including fillers, primers, finishes, and solvents, compliant with Oregon Administrative Rules,Division 22,regulating VOC emissions. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for high-performance coatings is based on products by Tnemec Company, Inc. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Sherwin Williams. 2. Carboline. 3. Devoe High-Performance Coatings. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 13117 SECTION 09 96 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 4. Ameron. 2.3 STEEL COATINGS A. Primer: Use manufacturer's factory-formulated primer that is certified compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated. 1. Provide only factory-grind primer. Quick-tint primer/sealers are not acceptable. 2. Application of shop-applied primer for steel fabrications is included in the Work of Division 05 Section"Metal Fabrications." 3. Acrylic Primer at Existing Door,Metal Roof and Miscellaneous Exterior Steel: Water-based rust- inhibitive coating. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,acrylic primers that may be incorporated in the Work include: 1) Series 151 Elasto-Grip. 4. Zinc-Rich Primer: For use at Exterior Steel Handrails. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,epoxy primers that may be incorporated in the Work include: 1) Series 90-97. B. Intermediate Coat Materials: Manufacturer's factory-formulated intermediate coat materials that are certified compatible with the substrate,primers or base coat materials,and finish coats indicated. 1. Epoxy Intermediate Coats: For use at Exterior Steel Handrails. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,epoxy intermediate coats that may be incorporated in the Work include: 1) Series 66. C. Finish Coat Materials: Water-based, low-VOC high-dispersion pure acrylic polymer coating that is compatible with the substrate,primers or base coat materials indicated. 1. Architectural Finish Coats: For use at Existing Door,Metal Roof and Miscellaneous Exterior Steel. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,acrylic polymer finish coats that may be incorporated in the Work include: 1) Series 1029 Enduratone. 2. Polyurethane Architectural Finish Coats: For use at Exterior Steel Handrails. b. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,polyurethane fmish coats that may be incorporated in the Work include: HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 13117 SECTION 09 96 00-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 1) Series 73 by Tnemec. 3. Color: To match MP-2 metal panels. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which coatings will be applied for compliance with coating manufacturer's requirements for applying coatings. 1. Do not proceed with coating application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Start of application will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces within that particular area. B. Surfaces to receive coatings must be thoroughly dry before coatings are applied. C. Require that identification marks on steel components are made with wax crayon to facilitate removal prior to application of steel coating. D. Review sections in which other coatings are provided to ensure compatibility of all coating system components,including substrates. 1. On request, provide information on the characteristics of specified finish materials to ensure compatible primers. 2. Notify the Architect in writing of problems anticipated using coatings specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and coating. 1. Remove these items,if necessary,to completely coat the items and adjacent surfaces. 2. Following the coating operations in each space or area,have removed items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning, General: Before applying coatings or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. 1. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. 2. Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminates from the cleaning process will not fall on wet,newly coated surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as scheduled. 1. Existing Door and Metal Roof,and Miscellaneous Exterior Steel: At Contractor's option,perform one of the following: a. Abrade 100%of surface(s)to be coated using 3M pad. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 13117 SECTION 09 96 00-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS b. Prepare existing metal roof, flashing and trim surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP WJ-4, "Water Jet Cleaning of Metals—Light Cleaning." D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare materials according to the coating manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of coatings according to the manufacturer's directions. 2. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. 3. Use only the types of thinners approved by the manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Field addition of colorants is prohibited. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply steel coatings by brush,roller,spray or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions. 1. Use brushes best suited for the material being applied. 2. Use rollers of carpet,velvet back,or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Use spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 4. Do not apply coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film. 5. Provide finish coats compatible with the primers used. 6. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Where sanding is required by manufacturer's directions,sand between applications to produce a smooth,even surface. 7. When undercoats or other conditions show through the fmal coat,apply additional coats until the cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to edges, corners, crevices, welds, exposed fasteners, and similar surfaces to ensure that they receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. B. Scheduling Primer Coating:Schedule and sequence priming operations such that primer coat is applied to surfaces that have been cleaned,pretreated,or otherwise prepared for coating within 4—6 hours of blast cleaning and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient drying time between successive coats. 2. Do not re-coat until the coating has dried so it feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where applying another coat does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer,except where specifically noted otherwise. D. Re-coat primed and sealed substrates where suction spots or unsealed areas in the first coat indicate possible bum-through or other defects in the finish coat caused by insufficient sealing. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 13117 SECTION 09 96 00-6 PERMIT ssr 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 1. Field Application of Primer and Coating Touch-up: Touch up all steel after erection as follows: All field-applied primer to be applied within 4-6 hours of final surface preparation. Contractor to sequence coating touch-up work accordingly. 2. Where area to be touched-up is less than or equal to one square foot,apply specified intermediate coat material for that area as the touch-up primer. Intermediate and finish coating materials to remain as specified. 3. Where area to be touched-up is greater than one square foot,apply primer,intermediate and finish coating materials as specified. E. Spray Applications: Apply coatings by airless or conventional spray techniques when permitted by the manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Wherever using spray application, do not double-back with spray equipment, building-up a film thickness of two coats in one pass,unless recommended by the manufacturer. F. Brush Application: Where spray application is not possible,brush-out and work brush coats into surfaces in an even film. 1. Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. 2. Neatly draw glass lines and color breaks. G. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color,texture and coverage. Remove,refinish,or recoat work not complying with specified requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor's Responsibility for Quality Control: 1. The coating sub-contractor is required to inspect surfaces prior to paint application in accordance with PDCA Standard P4-94, "Responsibilities for Inspection and Acceptance of Surfaces Prior to Painting and Decorating." If any surfaces to be coated are not satisfactorily prepared by others, the coating sub-contractor is to notify Contractor immediately. 2. Coating sub-contractor is to document environmental conditions at time of coating application. 3. Coating sub-contractor is to document wet and dry film thickness as installed. B. The Owner reserves the right to have paint materials tested by any means deemed appropriate as often as the Owner deems necessary during coating operations. 1. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the coatings being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The list of tests that the Owner may choose to have run during the course of Work includes,but is not limited to,the following: a. D562 Consistency of Paints Using Stormer Viscometer. b. D1210 Fineness of Dispersion of Pigment-Vehicle Systems. c. D1475 Density of Paint,Varnish Lacquer,And Related Products. d. D2369 Volatile Content of Paints. e. D2371 Pigment Content of Solvent-Reducible Paints. f. D1729 Visual Evaluation of Color Differences of Opaque Materials. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 13117 SECTION 09 96 00-7 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS g. D2244 Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. h. D523 Specular Gloss. i. D4449 Visual Evaluation of Gloss Differences between Surfaces of Similar Appearance. J. D2805 Hiding Power of Paint by Reflectometry. k. D2248 Detergent Resistance of Organic Finishes. 1. D3450 Washability Properties of Interior Architectural Coatings. m. D4064 Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Tabor Abrader. n. B117 Salt Spray(Fog)Testing. o. D822 Light and Water Exposure Apparatus (Carbon Arc Type) for Testing Paint, Varnish,Lacquers,and Related Products. p. D3456 Determining by Exterior Exposure Tests the Susceptibility of Paint Films to Microbiological Attack. 3. If results show materials being used do not comply with requirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop work and remove noncomplying materials,pay for testing,re-coat surfaces coated with rejected materials, or remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if,upon re- coating with specified materials,the two coatings are not compatible. 3.5 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday,remove rubbish,empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from the site. B. Where undercoats or other conditions show through final coat,apply additional coats until the cured film is of uniform coating finish,color,and appearance. C. After completing work, clean glass and spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping,or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning,repairing,replacing,and re-coating,as acceptable to the Architect. Leave in an undamaged condition. 1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing coating operations. 2. At completion of other trades' construction activities, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. END OF SECTION HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 13117 SECTION 09 96 00-8 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS A. All work under this Section shall comply with the requirements of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements, and shall include all Sections specified herein. B. Contractor to incorporate electrical requirements from: 1. Architectural and interior design drawings and specifications. 2. Mechanical,Plumbing and Electrical drawings and specifications. C. Contractor shall reference existing design documents,including: 1. Original 1969 design documents. 2. 1973 Addition documents. 3. 1977 Addition documents. 1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements of Division 01. This is a design and construct contract where the contractor shall provide permit documents for the following systems;Extension of existing fire sprinkler system. B. Architectural: The preliminary program includes the renovation of the existing 1970's era office building in two phases.Phase I will focus on the demolition and reconstruction of the core elements of the building and Phase II will include completion of tenant specific improvements.The renovations will include the following building elements: 1. Main lobby. 2. Open office with exposed ceiling—base infrastructure. C. Design/Build: 1. The Contractor shall provide ongoing design dialog to include engineered drawings for submittals to the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ),architect and Owner for review and comment. 2. All design drawings will be prepared in AutoCAD 2012 or a similar drafting software. All programs must interface with architectural drafting program. 3. It is expected that the Contractor shall provide a total of two sets of design drawings for review and comment by the Owner and the Architect. a. One set of design drawings will be submitted at approximately 100%Design Development. 1) These shall be coordinated and up to date with the other trades/contractors. This shall include but not be limited to: a) Architectural Design. b) Mechanical Contractor. c) Plumbing Contractor. d) Electrical Contractor. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION 13117 SECTION 21 05 00- 1 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION b. The second set of design drawings shall be submitted at 75% Construction Documents or Permit submission. 1) These drawings shall be coordinated as noted above. D. Fire Protection: 1. General: a. The existing fire protection system to remain in place. b. Modify fire sprinkler branch lines and sprinkler heads to serve the revised mechanical rooms and PBX room. c. Submit appropriate fire sprinkler drawings and calculations for permitting of core and shell package. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. Summary of Work: I. Documents to be provided for review and to AHJ: a. Fire Sprinkler plans at 1/8"=1' scale. b. Fire Sprinkler calculations c. Code compliance documentation B. Specifications: Meet design requirements of attached Specifications that in general,describe quality and character of materials and equipment. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 07: Thermal and Moisture Protection. 1. Sealants and caulking. 2. Firestopping. B. Division 09: Finishes: 1. Division 21 installers shall perform all painting,except where specifically stated otherwise in Division 09. C. Division 26: Electrical is related to work of: 1. Fire protection alarms and relays. 2. Life safety provisions. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS • A. The Contractor is cautioned that code requirements not explicitly detailed in these specifications,but which may be reasonably inferred or implied from the nature of the project,must be provided as part of the contract. B. Perform all tests required by governing authorities and required under all Division 21 Sections. Provide written reports on all tests. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION 13117 SECTION 21 05 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION C. Provide in accordance with rules and regulations of the following: 1. Building Codes enforced by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in Oregon: a. 2009 International Building Code(IBC)with State Amendments. b. 2009 International Mechanical Code(IMC)with State Amendments. c. 2009 Uniform Plumbing Code(UPC)with State Amendments. d. 2009 International Fire Code(IFC)with State Amendment. e. 2009 National Fuel Gas Code(NFGC)NFPA 54,WAC 51-52. f. 2008 National Electrical Code(NEC). g. 2009 Oregon State Energy Code. 2. Local,city,county and state codes and ordinances. 3. Local Bureau of Buildings. 4. Local Health Department. 5. Local and State Fire Prevention Districts. 6. State Administrative Codes. D. Provide in accordance with appropriate referenced standards of the following: 1. NFPA-National Fire Protection Association. 2. ANSI-American National Standards Institute. 3. ASME-American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 4. ASTM-American Society for Testing Materials. 5. AWS-American Welding Society. 6. AWWA-American Water Works Association. 7. FM-Factory Mutual. 8. MSS-Manufacturer's Standardization Society. 9. NEMA-National Electrical Manufacturer's Association. 10. UL-Underwriters Laboratories. 11. ADA-Americans with Disabilities Act. 12. ETL-Electrical Testing Laboratories. 13. IAPMO-International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Nameplates: Nameplates on manufactured items shall be aluminum or Type 304 stainless steel sheet,not less than 20 USG(0.0375"),riveted or bolted to the manufactured item,with nameplate data engraved or punched to form a non-erasable record of equipment data. B. Current Models. All work shall be as follows: 1. Manufactured items furnished shall be the current,cataloged product of the manufacturer. 2. Replacement parts shall be readily available and stocked in the USA. C. Experience: Unless more stringent requirements are specified in other sections of Division 21,manufactured items shall have been installed and used,without modification,renovation or repair,on other projects for not less than one year prior to the date of bidding for this project. 1.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Examine all existing conditions at building site. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION 13117 SECTION 21 05 00-3 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION B. Review contract documents and technical specifications for extent of new work to be provided. C. Provide and pay for all permits,licenses,fees and inspections. D. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the fmal location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with fmal location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. This work shall include furnishing and installing all access doors required for mechanical access. E. Coordinate equipment and materials installation with other building components. F. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. G. Arrange for chases,slots,and openings in other building components to allow for installations. H. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components,as they are constructed. I. Sequence,coordinate,and integrate installations of materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large tanks or equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. J. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of equipment and materials. Contractor to provide for all cutting and patching required for installation of his work unless otherwise noted. K. Install fire protection services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. L. Install equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,without interference with other installations. M. Coordinate the installation of materials and equipment above ceilings with ductwork, piping, conduits, suspension system,light fixtures,cable trays,and other installations. N. Coordinate connection of systems with exterior underground utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. O. All materials(such as insulation,piping,wiring,controls,etc.)located within air plenum spaces,air shafts, and occupied spaces shall have a flame-spread index of 25 or less,and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E84(NFPA 255)Method. In addition,the products,when tested,shall not drip flame particles,and flame shall not be progressive. Provide Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,label or listing,or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing laboratory to prove the fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do not exceed those specified. P. Products made of or containing lead,asbestos,mercury or other known toxic or hazardous materials are not acceptable for installation under this Division. Any such products installed as part of the work of the Division shall be removed and replaced and all costs for removal and replacement shall be borne solely by the installing Contractor. 1.8 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Contractor shall certify the following items are correct when using substituted products other than those suggested: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. 2. The Contractor shall pay for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, structural supports,and construction costs caused by proposed substitution. 3. The proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades,construction schedule,or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts available locally are readily obtainable for the proposed substitute. B. The Contractor further certifies function,appearance,and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to specified item. C. The Contractor agrees that the terms and conditions for the substituted product that are found in the contract documents apply to this proposed substitution. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION 13117 SECTION 21 05 00-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION 1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS A. Working Plans: Prepare scaled working plans for fire protection pipe and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to,pipe and tube sizes,locations,and elevations and slopes of horizontal runs,wall and floor penetrations,and connections. Indicate interface between and spatial relationship to piping and adjacent equipment. Lettering shall be minimum 1/8"high. All design work shall be done under supervision of licensed engineer. B. Submittal Drawings: Submit shop drawings to Agency having jurisdiction for approval bearing engineer of record stamp.Submit six approved copies,bearing stamp and/or signature of authority having jurisdiction to the Engineer for review and comment. 1. Contractor shall submit sprinkler head locations to Architect for approval. 2. Each calculation shall include legible schematic of system showing all hydraulic reference points. C. Hydraulic Calculations:Prepare hydraulic calculations of fire protection systems. Submit to authority having jurisdiction for approval. Submit six approved copies,bearing stamp,and/or signature of Agency having jurisdiction to Owner's representative for review and comment. 1. Contractor shall submit published piping friction loss data from manufacturer with hydraulic calculations. D. Certificate of Installation:Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work,which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with NFPA 13,and also that system is operational,complete,and has no defects. E. Maintenance Data:Submit maintenance data and parts lists for fire protection materials and products. Include this data,product data,shop drawings,approval drawings,approval calculation,certificate of installation,and record drawings in maintenance manual;in accordance with requirements of the General Conditions and of Division 01. F. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Provide the Owner with three sets of operating and maintenance instructions covering completely the operation and maintenance of sprinkler equipment and controls. Manual shall be assembled in a 3-ring binder and arranged in following sections: 1.10 START-UP SERVICE AND BUILDING COMMISSIONING A. Prior to start-up,be assured that systems are ready, including checking the following: Proper equipment rotation,proper wiring,auxiliary connections,lubrication,venting,controls,and installed and properly set relief and safety valves. B. Provide services of factory-trained technicians for start-up of pumps,and other major pieces of equipment. Certify in writing compliance with this Paragraph,stating names of personnel involved and the date work was performed. C. Refer to other Division 21 Sections for additional requirements. 1.11 INSTRUCTION,MAINTENANCE,AND O&M MANUALS A. O&M Manuals: Upon completion of the work,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect complete set of operating instructions,maintenance instructions,part lists,and all other bulletins and brochures pertinent to the operation and maintenance for equipment furnished and installed as specified in this section,bound in a durable binder. Refer to Division 01. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper instruction of Owner's personnel for operation and maintenance of equipment,and apparatus installed as specified in Division 21 to be no less than 2 hours for each piece of equipment. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION 13117 SECTION 21 05 00-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION 1.12 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names,model numbers,types,grades,compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment,storage,and handling. B. Store equipment and materials in an environmentally controlled area at the site,unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage. Piping shall be stored in bundles covered with Visqueen. Piping showing signs of rust shall be removed from site and replaced. C. Coordinate deliveries of materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations. 1.13 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Furnish approved operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the technical sections for use by operation personnel. The operating instructions shall include wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and equipment. Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. Attach or post operating instructions adjacent to each principal system and equipment including start-up,operating,shutdown,safety precautions and procedure in the event of equipment failure. Provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures for operating instructions exposed to the weather. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal. 1.14 CLEANING AND CLOSING A. All work shall be inspected,tested,and approved before being concealed or placed in operation. B. Upon completion of the work,all equipment installed as specified in this section,and all areas where work was performed,shall be cleaned to provide operating conditions satisfactory to the Architect. 1.15 WARRANTIES A. All equipment shall be provided with a minimum one-year warranty to include parts and labor. Refer to individual Equipment Specifications for extended or longer-term warranty requirements. B. Provide complete warranty information for each item,to include product or equipment,date of beginning of warranty or bond;duration of warranty or bond;and names,addresses,telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. C. Service during warranty period:Contractor shall provide maintenance as specified elsewhere during the 12- month warranty period. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor shall guarantee and service all workmanship and materials to be as represented by him and shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any part thereof which may become defective within the period of one(1)year after the Date of Final Acceptance,ordinary wear and tear excepted. B. Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for any damages caused by or resulting from defects in his work. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION 13117 SECTION 21 05 00-6 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Furnish and install all new material,equipment,and apparatus hereinafter specified unless specifically noted otherwise. All material,equipment,and apparatus shall be identified by the manufacturer's name,nameplate, and pertinent data. B. All materials,equipment,and apparatus are mentioned as standards unless noted otherwise. The words"or approved equal" shall be considered to be subsequent to all manufacturers' names used herein, unless specifically noted that substitutes are not allowed. C. All equipment will meet the requirements of this Division. Table of Contents is included to show future submissions. 2.2 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. General: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors,including,but not limited to,the following: 1. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products,which are UL listed and FM approved. 2. ASCE 7-05: "American Society of Civil Engineers." 3. 2009 International Building Code(IBC) 4. MSS Standard Compliance: Manufacturer's Standardization Society(MSS). 5. SMACNA: "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." 6. NFPA: Pamphlet number 13 and 14 for fire protection systems. 7. Provide copper plated or plastic coated supports and attachment for copper piping systems. Field applied coatings or tape is unacceptable. 8. Manufacturer:B-Line,Anvil International,Michigan,Tolco,Kin-Line,Simpson,or Superstrut. B. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: Except as otherwise indicated,provide factory-fabricated hangers and supports of one of the following MSS types listed. 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1. 2. Adjustable Steel Swivel Band Hangers: MSS Type 10. 3. U-Bolts: MSS Type 24. 4. Pipe Slides and Slide Plates: MSS Type 35,including one of the following plate types: a. Plate: Unguided type. b. Plate: Guided type. c. Plate: Hold-down clamp type. 5. Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36,including steel pipe base support and cast iron floor flange. 6. Pipe Saddle Supports with U-Bolt: MSS Type 37,including steel pipe base support and cast iron floor flange. 7. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 38,including steel pipe base support and cast iron floor flange. 8. Single Pipe Roller with Malleable Sockets: MSS Type 41. 9. Adjustable Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43. 10. Pipe Roll Stands: MSS Type 44. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION 13117 SECTION 21 05 00-7 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-FIRE PROTECTION 11. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel,consisting of a bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with a two-section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation(if any),and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. C. Horizontal Cushioned Pipe Clamp: Where pipe hangers are called out to absorb vibration or shock install a piping clamp with thermoplastic elastomer insert. Cush-A-Clamp or equal. D. Vertical Piping Clamps: Provide factory-fabricated two-bolt vertical piping riser clamps,MSS Type 8. E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated,provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments of one of the following MSS types listed. 1. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. 2. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. 4. Malleable Iron Eye Sockets: MSS Type 16. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17. F. Building Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated,provide factory-fabricated building attachments of one of the following types listed. 1. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18 or Blue Banger Hanger by Simpson 2. Steel Brackets: One of the following for indicated loading: a. Light Duty: MSS Type 31. b. Medium Duty: MSS Type 32. c. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33. 3. Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58. 4. Internally Threaded Expansion Shell Anchors:By Simpson or approved equal. 5. Concrete Screw Anchors:Titan HD by Simpson or approved equal. G. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML1. 2. Steel Plates,Shapes,and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A36. 3. Cement Grout: Portland Cement (ASTM C150,Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand(ASTM C404,Size No.2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. 4. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required. Weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. 2.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS-ABOVE GROUND A. General: The piping products listed below by manufacturer's name and model numbers are the recommended materials listed for this project. Piping or fittings that show substantial rust or breaks in coating will be removed and replaced. B. Branch piping:Allied Tube Schedule 40 black steel,ASTM A-135 stamped on pipe,UV cured acrylic finish; Stockham, Grinnell or Warwick Class 150 threaded malleable,ASTM A197, ASTM A126, or Victaulic roll-grooved fittings and couplings,only. C. Mains and Risers: Allied Tube Scheduled 10 black steel pipe,ASTM A-135 stamped on pipe,UV cured acrylic finish;Victaulic roll-grooved fittings and couplings. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-FIRE PROTECTION 13117 SECTION 21 05 00-8 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION D. Dry standpipe,dry sprinkler and pre-action sprinkler piping and fittings shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ASTM A-123. E. Shop-weld thread-o-lets may be used in lieu of tee fittings,but field(site)welding will not be permitted. F. Mechanical Couplings: Victaulic grooved couplings style 07,75 or 77,or equal by Gruvlok. G. Mechanical Tees: Victaulic style 920,Gruvlok. U-bolt mechanical tees are not acceptable. H. Flexible sprinkler connector for sprinklers in lay in ceilings: Flexhead or equal Factory Mutual approved system. I. Use rigid couplings where flexibility is not required or provide necessary sway bracing. J. Prohibited Piping and Fittings:Copper pipe/CPVC pipe,pipe less than schedule 40 for threaded or less than schedule 10 for roll grooving;Super 40,"Dyna-Thread","Fireflow",XL,Thinwall,"Eddylite"by Bullmoose and Threadable Lightwall pipe are not allowed. POZ-LOK,U-bolt Victaulic style 921 mechanical tees, Victaulic style 99 Roust-A-Bout,Victaulic style 90 Plainlock,Hooker style fitting,quick disconnect,boltless, snap joint,field drilling or welding of any main or branch lines,and any device specifically prohibited by the local authority having jurisdiction is not allowed. No unions shall be permitted for any size pipe. Plain end fittings are not allowed. 2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS AND ESCUTCHEONS A. Sprinkler heads installed shall be upright or pendent,as conditions require,and shall be of the following type and finish for the areas designated. Unless otherwise specified,sprinklers shall be small frame type,center bulb capsule for finished areas,fusible link for unfinished areas,and'h°orifice. Extended coverage heads not allowed in unfinished areas except garages. Sprinkler Escutcheon Building Area Sprinkler Head Finish Finish Temp.Deg. Unfinished Office, Upright/Pendant Brass None 165°F Mechanical Rooms Electrical,Telephone& Upright Brass None 286°F Switchgear Rooms B. Manufacturer:Reliable,Star or Viking. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Workmanship shall be performed by licensed journeymen or master fitter and shall result in an installation consistent with the best practices of trades. B. Install work uniform,level and plumb,in relationship to lines of building. Do not install any diagonal,or otherwise irregular work. C. All equipment will meet the requirements of this Division. Table of Contents is included to show future submissions. D. Where possible,all fire protection utilities shall be routed within the beam/joist space. 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. Follow manufacturers'directions and recommendations in all cases where the manufacturers of articles used on this Contract furnish directions covering points not covered in these Specifications. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION 13117 SECTION 21 05 00-9 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the work between the various Fire Protection Sections and with the work specified under other Divisions. If any cooperative work must be altered due to lack of proper supervision or failure to make proper and timely provisions,the alternations shall be made to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at the Contractor's cost. Coordinate wall and ceiling work with the General Contractor,and his subcontractors in locating ceiling air outlets,wall registers,etc. B. Inspect all material, equipment, and apparatus upon delivery and do not install any damaged or defected materials. 3.4 TESTING A. Provide all tests specified hereinafter and as otherwise required. Provide all test equipment,including test pumps,gauges,instruments,and other equipment required. Test all rotational equipment for proper direction of rotation. Upon completion of testing,certify to the Architect,in writing,that the specified tests have been performed and that the installation complies with the specified requirements and provide a report of the test observations signed by qualified inspector. END OF SECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—FIRE PROTECTION 13117 SECTION 21 05 00- 10 PERMrr SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS A. All work under this Section shall comply with the requirements of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements, and shall include all Sections specified herein. B. Contractor to incorporate electrical requirements from: 1. Architectural and interior design drawings and specifications. 2. Mechanical,Fire Protection and Electrical drawings and specifications. C. Contractor shall reference existing design documents,including: 1. Original 1969 design documents. 2. 1973 Addition documents. 3. 1977 Addition documents. 1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements of Division 01. This is a design and construct contract where the contractor shall provide permit documents for the following systems;Plumbing piping,plumbing fixtures including roof drains. B. Architectural: The preliminary program includes the renovation of the existing 1970's era office building in two phases.Phase I will focus on the demolition and reconstruction of the core elements of the building and Phase II will include completion of tenant specific improvements.The renovations will include the following building elements: 1. Main lobby. C. Design/Build: 1. The Contractor shall provide ongoing design dialog to include engineered drawings for submittals to the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ),Architect and Owner for review and comment. 2. All design drawings will be prepared in AutoCAD 2012 or a similar drafting software. All programs must interface with architectural drafting program. 3. It is expected that the Contractor shall provide a total of two sets of design drawings for review and comment by the owner and the Architect. a. One set of design drawings will be submitted at approximately 100%Design Development. 1) These shall be coordinated and up to date with the other trades/contractors. This shall include but not be limited to: a) Architectural Design. b) Mechanical Contractor. c) Fire Sprinkler Contractor. d) Electrical Contractor. b. The second set of design drawings shall be submitted at 75% Construction Documents or Permit submission. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 13117 SECTION 22 05 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 1) These drawings shall be coordinated as noted above. D. Plumbing: 1. General Description: Design a fully operable plumbing system in accordance with the governing codes and the following criteria: a. Roof drains/rain water leader system. b. Provide domestic water heater and storage tank to serve future common area fixtures. c. Cap existing domestic water system for future extension to restrooms and tenant improvement spaces. d. Extension of gas piping to HVAC package rooftop AC units. 2. Waste and Vent: Waste and vent systems shall be cast iron waste risers with ABS separate vent lines. 3. Storm Drain: Roof and overflow systems shall be cast iron.Daylight overflow drains near grade. 4. Domestic Water: a. Piping shall be type L copper with soldered or brazed joints for the domestic hot and cold water piping systems. Piping inside the units shall be PEX with an appropriate shut-off manifold in each apartment.A six inch main with double check valve assembly will serve the buildings.A six inch branch line for the high rise and a four inch branch line for the low rise will be required these sizes may change as the engineering design will dictate. b. Provide a wireless water metering system for metering and billing management system for residential tenant hot water. 5. Natural Gas: Natural gas will be provided for the two make-up air handlers(one on the high rise roof, one on the low rise roof),boilers serving the water source heat pump condensing loop,any amenity BBQs or fireplaces and the central domestic water heater systems(located in the high rise penthouse mechanical room for the high rise hot water and on the roof mechanical room for the low rise hot water. The gas service shall be centrally metered and passed on as a renters fee.Gas piping shall be schedule 40 steel pipe,with welded and threaded fittings. 6. Piping Insulation: Fiberglass insulation shall be provided for domestic hot and cold water piping systems. Horizontal rainwater leaders and drain bodies shall be insulated with fiberglass blanket. 7. Domestic Water Heating Systems: a. Provide a central domestic water heating system that includes a natural gas water heater and storage tank. Coordinate exact location of gas water heater/tank with Architect. The water would be distributed at 120°F. The domestic hot water piping would parallel the domestic cold water piping including the pressure reducing station and pressure zones. b. Suggested Basis of Design: 1) Domestic Water Heater:A.O. Smith BTH-series. 8. Plumbing Fixtures: No plumbing fixtures are included as part of this core and shell package. Refer to drawing A010 for required vs provided fixture scope. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. Summary of Work: 1. Documents to be provided for review and to AHJ: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 13117 SECTION 22 05 00-2 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING a. Plumbing plans at 1/8"=1' scale. b. Plumbing calculations. c. Code compliance documentation. B. Specifications: Meet design requirements of attached Specifications that in general,describe quality and character of materials and equipment. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall refer to the architectural interior details,floor plans,elevations,and the structural and other Contract Drawings and he shall coordinate his work with that of the other trades to avoid interference. B. The Contractor shall comply with the project closeout requirements as detailed in General Requirements of Division 01. 1.5 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE. A. Division 07: Thermal and Moisture Protection. 1. Flashing and sheet metal. 2. Sealants and caulking. 3. Firestopping. B. Division 09: Finishes: 1. Division 22 installers shall perform all painting,except where specifically stated otherwise in Division 09. 2. Painting of all exposed steel,piping,equipment,and materials. 3. Paint all exposed gas piping,exterior to the building,yellow. C. Division 26: Electrical is related to work of: 1. Power connections to all plumbing equipment. 2. Life safety provisions. 1.6 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The Contractor is cautioned that code requirements not explicitly detailed in these specifications or drawings,but which may be reasonably inferred or implied from the nature of the project,must be provided as part of the contract. B. Perform all tests required by governing authorities and required under all Division 22 Sections. Provide written reports on all tests. C. Electrical devices and wiring shall conform to the latest standards of NEC;all devices shall be UL listed and labeled. D. All plumbing work shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA). E. All excavation work completed by and included in other divisions at the direction of this division must comply with all provisions of state laws including notification to all owners of underground utilities at least 48 business day hours,but not more than 10 business days,before commencing an excavation. F. Provide in accordance with rules and regulations of the following: 1. Building Codes enforced by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in Oregon: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 13117 SECTION 22 05 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING a. 2009 International Building Code(IBC)with State Amendments. b. 2009 International Mechanical Code(IMC)with State Amendments. c. 2009 Uniform Plumbing Code(UPC)with State Amendments. d. 2009 International Fire Code(IFC)with State Amendment. e. 2009 National Fuel Gas Code(NFGC)NFPA 54,WAC 51-52. f. 2008 National Electrical Code(NEC). g. 2009 Oregon State Energy Code. 2. Local,city,county and state codes and ordinances. 3. Local Bureau of Buildings. 4. Local Health Department. 5. Local and State Fire Prevention Districts. 6. State Administrative Codes. G. Provide in accordance with appropriate referenced standards of the following: 1. NFPA-National Fire Protection Association. 2. CSA-Canadian Standards Association. 3. ADC-Air Diffuser Council. 4. ANSI-American National Standards Institute. 5. ASHRAE-American Society of Heating,Refrigerating&Air Conditioning Engineers. 6. ASME-American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 7. ASTM-American Society for Testing Materials. 8. AWS-American Welding Society. 9. AWWA-American Water Works Association. 10. FM-Factory Mutual. 11. MSS-Manufacturer's Standardization Society. 12. NEMA-National Electrical Manufacturer's Association. 13. SMACNA-Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. 14. UL-Underwriters Laboratories. 15. ADA-Americans with Disabilities Act. 16. ETL-Electrical Testing Laboratories. 17. ASSE-American Society of Sanitary Engineers. 18. PDI-Plumbing and Drainage Institute. 19. IAPMO-International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials. 20. CISPI-Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Nameplates: Nameplates on manufactured items shall be aluminum or Type 304 stainless steel sheet,not less than 20 USG(0.0375"),riveted or bolted to the manufactured item,with nameplate data engraved or punched to form a non-erasable record of equipment data. B. Current Models. All work shall be as follows: 1. Manufactured items furnished shall be the current,cataloged product of the manufacturer. 2. Replacement parts shall be readily available and stocked in the USA. C. Experience: Unless more stringent requirements are specified in other sections of Division 22,manufactured items shall have been installed and used,without modification,renovation or repair,on other projects for not less than one year prior to the date of bidding for this project. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 13117 SECTION 22 05 00-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 1.8 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Examine all existing conditions at building site. B. Review contract documents and technical specifications for extent of new work to be provided. C. Provide and pay for all permits,licenses,fees and inspections. D. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with fmal location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. This work shall include furnishing and installing all access doors required for mechanical access. E. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. Refer to Equipment Specifications in Divisions 02 through 48 for rough-in requirements. F. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components. G. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. H. Arrange for chases,slots,and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. I. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components,as they are constructed. J. Sequence,coordinate,and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. K. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of mechanical equipment and materials. Contractor to provide for all cutting and patching required for installation of his work unless otherwise noted. L. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned,install plumbing services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. M. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,without interference with other installations. N. Coordinate the installation of plumbing materials and equipment above ceilings with ductwork, piping, conduits,suspension system,light fixtures,cable trays,sprinkler piping and heads,and other installations. O. Coordinate connection of plumbing systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations,franchised service companies,and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. P. Coordinate with Owner in advance to schedule shutdown of existing systems to make new connections. Provide valves in new piping to allow existing system to be put back in service with minimum down time. Q. All materials(such as insulation,piping,wiring,controls,etc.)located within air plenum spaces,air shafts, and occupied spaces shall have a flame-spread index of 25 or less,and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E84(NFPA 255)Method. In addition,the products,when tested,shall not drip flame particles,and flame shall not be progressive. Provide Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label or listing,or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing laboratory to prove the fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do not exceed those specified. R. Coordinate installation of floor drains and floor sinks with work of other trades,such that finished floor slopes to drains and floor sinks are flush with surrounding floor. S. Products made of or containing asbestos, mercury or other known toxic or hazardous materials are not acceptable for installation under this Division. Any such products installed as part of the work of the Division shall be removed and replaced and all costs for removal and replacement shall be borne solely by the installing Contractor. T. Pipes,pipe fittings,plumbing fittings and fixtures that come into contact with the wetted surface of a public water system or any plumbing in a facility providing water for human consumption shall be"Lead Free". BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 13117 SECTION 22 05 00-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 1.9 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Contractor shall certify the following items are correct when using substituted products other than those suggested: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. 2. The Contractor shall pay for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, structural supports,and construction costs caused by proposed substitution. 3. The proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades,construction schedule,or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts available locally are readily obtainable for the proposed substitute. B. The Contractor further certifies function,appearance,and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to specified item. C. The Contractor agrees that the terms and conditions for the substituted product that are found in the contract documents apply to this proposed substitution. 1.10 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS A. The Contractors shall prepare coordinated Shop Drawings to coordinate the installation and location of all equipment,piping and all system appurtenances with other trades. The Drawings shall include all equipment rooms and floor plans. The Drawings shall be Overlay Drawings showing each discipline on a single sheet. The Drawings shall be keyed to the structural column identification system, and shall be progressively numbered. Prior to completion of the Drawings,the Contractor shall coordinate the proposed installation with the Architect and the structural requirements, and all other trades (including HVAC, Fire Protection, Electrical,Ceiling Suspension,and Tile Systems),and provide reasonable maintenance access requirements. When conflicts are identified,modify system layout as necessary to resolve. Do not fabricate,order or install any equipment or materials until coordination documents are approved by the General Contractor,Architect, and Owner. Within thirty(30)days after award of Contract,submit proposed coordination document Shop Drawing schedule,allowing adequate time for review and approval by parties mentioned above. Drawings should be prepared and submitted for approval on a floor-by-floor basis to phase with building construction. 1. Download to a site that will give access to all trades and provide additional coordination as needed. B. Advise the Architect in the event a conflict occurs in the location or connection of equipment. Bear all costs for relocation of equipment,resulting from failure to properly coordinate the installation or failure to advise the Architect of conflict. C. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding all existing material, equipment and apparatus,and advise the Architect of any discrepancies between those indicated on the Drawings and those existing in the field prior to any installation related thereto. D. Final Coordination Drawings with all appropriate information added are to be submitted as Record Drawings at completion of project. E. Provide copy of Record Drawings to Testing and Balancing Contractor for their use when doing their work. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 13117 SECTION 22 05 00-6 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Before commencing installation,print out an extra set of prints,marked"Record." Keep this set of Drawings at the job site at all times,and use it for no other purpose but to mark on it all the changes and revisions to the Construction Drawings resulting from coordination with other trades. At the completion of the project,edit project AutoCAD files to incorporate all site markups,changes, and revisions to the Contract Drawings. Submit plots of Record Drawings and six copies CD Rom(s)labeled with all record drawings and AutoCAD drawing files. B. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to piping size and location both exterior and interior;including locations of control devices, valves, and similar units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations,dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping systems,with valves and control devices located and numbered,concealed unions located,and with items requiring maintenance located(i.e.— valves,traps,strainers,etc.);Change Orders;concealed control system devices. C. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions;Change Orders;actual equipment and materials used. D. Refer also to Special Conditions in Division 01 for full scope of requirements. 1.12 START-UP SERVICE AND BUILDING COMMISSIONING A. Prior to start-up, be assured that systems are ready, including checking the following: Proper equipment rotation,proper wiring,auxiliary connections,lubrication,venting,controls,and installed and properly set relief and safety valves. B. Provide services of factory-trained technicians for start-up of temperature controls,boilers,pumps,and other major pieces of equipment. Certify in writing compliance with this Paragraph,stating names of personnel involved and the date work was performed. C. Refer to other Division 22 Sections for additional requirements. 1.13 INSTRUCTION,MAINTENANCE,AND O&M MANUALS A. O&M Manuals: Upon completion of the work,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect complete set of operating instructions,maintenance instructions,part lists,and all other bulletins and brochures pertinent to the operation and maintenance for equipment furnished and installed as specified in this section,bound in a durable binder. Refer to Division 01. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper instruction of Owner's personnel for operation and maintenance of equipment,and apparatus installed as specified in Division 22 to be no less than 1 hour for each piece of equipment. 1.14 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names,model numbers,types,grades,compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment,storage,and handling. B. Store equipment and materials in an environmentally controlled area at the site,unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage. Piping shall covered with visqueen. Piping showing signs of rust shall be removed from site and replaced. C. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 13117 SECTION 22 05 00-7 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 1.15 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 for the requirements of temporary water and sewer for construction and safety. Provide temporary water, and sewer, etc. services as necessary during the construction period and as required to maintain operation of existing systems. 1.16 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Furnish approved operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the technical sections for use by operation personnel. The operating instructions shall include wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and equipment. Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions in Mechanical Room. 1.17 CLEANING AND CLOSING A. All work shall be inspected,tested,and approved before being concealed or placed in operation. B. Upon completion of the work,all equipment installed as specified in this section,and all areas where work was performed,shall be cleaned to provide operating conditions satisfactory to the Architect. 1.18 WARRANTIES A. All equipment shall be provided with a minimum one-year warranty to include parts and labor. Refer to individual Equipment Specifications for extended or longer-term warranty requirements. B. Provide complete warranty information for each item,to include product or equipment,date of beginning of warranty or bond;duration of warranty or bond;and names,addresses,telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. C. Service during warranty period:Contractor shall provide maintenance as specified elsewhere during the 12- month warranty period. 1.19 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor shall guarantee and service all workmanship and materials to be as represented by him and shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any part thereof which may become defective within the period of one(1)year after the Date of Final Acceptance,ordinary wear and tear excepted. B. Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for any damages caused by or resulting from defects in his work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Furnish and install all new material,equipment,and apparatus hereinafter specified unless specifically noted otherwise. All material,equipment,and apparatus shall be identified by the manufacturer's name,nameplate, and pertinent data. B. All materials,equipment,and apparatus are mentioned as standards unless noted otherwise.. The words"or approved equal"shall be considered to be subsequent to all manufacturers'names used herein,substitutes will be allowed provided they are of equal quality and capacities. C. All equipment will meet the requirements of this Division. Table of Contents is included to show future submissions. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 13117 SECTION 22 05 00-8 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-PLUMBING 2.2 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. General: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors,including,but not limited to,the following: 1. UL: Provide products,which are UL listed. 2. ASCE 7-05: "American Society of Civil Engineers." 3. 2009 International Building Code(IBC) 4. MSS Standard Compliance: Manufacturer's Standardization Society(MSS). 5. SMACNA: "Seismic Restraint Manual:Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." 6. NFPA: Pamphlet number 13 and 14 for fire protection systems. 7. Provide copper plated or plastic coated supports and attachment for copper piping systems. Field applied coatings or tape is unacceptable. 8. Manufacturer:B-Line,Grinnell,Michigan,Tolco,Kin-Line,Simpson,or Superstrut. B. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: Except as otherwise indicated,provide factory-fabricated hangers and supports of one of the following MSS types listed. 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1. 2. Adjustable Steel Swivel Band Hangers: MSS Type 10. 3. U-Bolts: MSS Type 24. 4. Pipe Slides and Slide Plates: MSS Type 35,including one of the following plate types: a. Plate: Unguided type. b. Plate: Guided type. c. Plate: Hold-down clamp type. 5. Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36,including steel pipe base support and cast iron floor flange. 6. Pipe Saddle Supports with U-Bolt: MSS Type 37,including steel pipe base support and cast iron floor flange. 7. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 38,including steel pipe base support and cast iron floor flange. 8. Single Pipe Roller with Malleable Sockets: MSS Type 41. 9. Adjustable Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43. 10. Pipe Roll Stands: MSS Type 44. 11. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides where required of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of a bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with a two-section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation(if any),and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. C. Horizontal Cushioned Pipe Clamp: Where pipe hangers are called out to absorb vibration or shock install a piping clamp with thermoplastic elastomer insert. Cush-A-Clamp or equal. D. Vertical Piping Clamps: Provide factory-fabricated two-bolt vertical piping riser clamps,MSS Type 8. E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated,provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments of one of the following MSS types listed. 1. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. 2. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. 4. Malleable Iron Eye Sockets: MSS Type 16. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-PLUMBING 13117 SECTION 22 05 00-9 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING F. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML1. 2. Steel Plates,Shapes,and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A36. 3. Cement Grout: Portland Cement(ASTM C150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand(ASTM C404,Size No.2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. 4. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required. Weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. 5. Pipe Brackets: "HoldRite"copper plated brackets. Insulate brackets attached to metal studs with felt. 2.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINTMBRATION ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment,piping,and all system appurtenances(including weight of normal operating contents)shall be adequately restrained to resist seismic forces. Restraint devices shall be designed and selected to meet seismic requirements as defined in Chapter 16 of the latest edition of the IBC,with State Amendments,and applicable local codes and the applicable Importance Factors and Soil Factors. B. All anchorages and/or seismic restraints shall be designed by a registered professional Civil or Structural Engineer licensed in the state of the project. Design shall include: 1. Number, size and location of anchors for floor or roof-mounted equipment. For curb mounted equipment,provide design of attachment of both the unit to the curb and the curb to the structure. 2. Number, size and location of vibration isolators, seismic restraint devices and their anchorage for vibration-isolated and suspended equipment. 3. Number, size and location of braces and anchors for suspended piping and ductwork on shop drawings. a. The contractor must select a single seismic restraint system pre-designed to meet the requirements of the current version of the IBC with State Amendments. b. Installations not addressed by the selected system must be designed,detailed and submitted along with the shop drawings. c. Maximum seismic loads shall be indicated on drawings at each brace location. d. Drawings shall bear the stamp and signature of the registered professional engineer licensed in the state of the project who designed the layout of the braces. 4. Manufacturers:Mason,M.W. Sausse,Kinetics or approved equal. C. Isolated Equipment: 1. Spring hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1-1/4"thick neoprene elements at the top and steel springs that are free standing and laterally stable seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup at the bottom. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50%of the rated deflection. The neoprene element and the cup shall have a neoprene bushing projecting through the steel box.Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring.Manufacturer. Mason Industries#30N or approved equal. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 13117 SECTION 22 05 00- 10 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 2. Suspended isolated equipment and vessels shall be protected with cable restraints. Cables shall be installed to prevent excessive seismic motion and so arranged that they do not engage during normal operation,starting or stopping.Seismic sway braces shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables. Cables braces shall be designed to resist seismic tension loads with a minimum safety factor of 2. Brace end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle. Steel angles or struts, when required, shall be clamped to the threaded hanger rods at the seismic sway brace locations utilizing a minimum of two ductile iron clamps.Manufacturer:Mason Industries#SCB,SRC and UC. 3. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3" and larger shall be flanged.Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Hoses must have sufficient length to accept 1/2"intermittent motion without failure.Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. Manufacturer. Mason Industries#BSS. D. Rigidly Mounted Equipment: Floor mounted equipment weighing over 400 lbs.and suspended equipment and vessels of any weight shall be protected by properly sized anchor bolts or hanger rods and bracing and,if required,by additional seismic restraints as described above for isolated equipment. E. All non-isolated piping and ductwork shall be protected in accordance with the SMACNA Guidelines. At the Contractor's option,for ease of installation,cable restraint system may be used. Installations not addressed in the SMACNA Guidelines shall be designed by a registered professional engineer who designed the seismic bracing for the suspended piping and ductwork. F. Submittals: 1. Confirmation of responsible design party(Shop Drawings received without this information will be rejected without review. Architect will be informed of potential delay of project.) a. The seismic manufacturer's representative or engineer responsible for preparing the specified seismic submittal package shall send the following documentation of qualification: 1) The name and professional engineer's license number of the structural engineer who will be responsible for preparing,designing,and stamping the seismic shop drawing information. 2. Shop Drawings Submittal: a. Stamped seismic restraint calculations. b. The type,size and deflection of each isolator proposed. c. Details for all the isolators with snubbers proposed and seismic bracing. d. Details for steel frames to be used in conjunction with the isolation and seismic restraint of the items. 2.4 PIPE PORTALS A. Where pipe portals are not provided by other sections of Specification,provide prefabricated insulated pipe portals as required for piping penetrating through the roof where shown on plans. Field built pipe portals are acceptable alternatives—shop drawings or provide detail of construction for review. B. Standard pipe portals,unless otherwise noted,shall be constructed as follows: 1. Curb shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel with continuous welds on shell seams. 2. Insulation to be 1-1/2"thick,3 lb density rigid fiberglass. 3. Curb to have a raised 3"(minimum),45°cant. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 13117 SECTION 22 05 00- 11 PERMIT ser 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 4. Curb to have 1-1/2"x 1-1/2"wood nailer(minimum). 5. Curb height to be 8"(minimum)above roof deck. 6. Cant shall be raised to match roof insulation thickness. 7. Cover or flashing to be constructed of galvanized steel or other suitable material to provide sturdy weather tight closure. Provide collars and rubber nipples with draw bands of sizes required by piping. Size curb,cover and nipples per manufacturer's recommendations. 8. Manufacturer: Roof Products Systems or Pate. 2.5 ACCESS PANELS AND ACCESS DOORS A. Provide all access doors and panels to serve equipment under this work, including those which must be installed,in finished architectural surfaces. Frame of 16-gauge steel,door of 20 gauge steel. 1"flange width, continuous piano hinge,key operated,prime coated. Refer to Architectural Specifications for the required product Specification for each surface.Contractor is to submit schedule of access panels for approval. Exact size,number and location of access panels is not shown on Plans. Access doors shall be of a size to permit removal of equipment for servicing. Access door shall have same rating as the wall or ceiling in which it is mounted. Provide access panel for each trap primer or concealed valve. Use no panel smaller than 12"x 12" for simple manual access,or smaller than 24"x 24"where personnel must pass through.Provide cylinder lock for access door serving mixing or critical valves in public areas. B. Included under this work is the responsibility for verifying the exact location and type of each access panel or door required to serve equipment under this work and in the proper sequence to keep in tune with construction and with prior approval of the Architect. Access doors in fire rated partitions and ceilings shall carry all label ratings as required to maintain the rating of the rated assembly. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Milcor,Karp,Nystrom,or Elmdor/Stoneman. D. Submit markup of architectural plans showing size and location of access panels required for equipment access for approval by Architect. 2.6 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS A. Mechanical Identification Materials: Provide products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 22 Sections. Where more than single type is specified for application,selection is installer's option,but provide single selection for each product category. Stencils are not acceptable. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: 1. Pressure Sensitive Type: Provide pre-printed,permanent adhesive,color coded,pressure sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. Secure both ends of markers with color coded adhesive vinyl tape. 2. Insulation: Furnish 1"thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125°F(52°C)or greater. Cut length to extend 2"beyond each end of plastic pipe marker. 3. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow,either integrally with piping system service lettering(to accommodate both directions),or as separate unit of plastic. C. Valve Tags: 1. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 1 1/2"diameter 19-gauge polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4"high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2"high,and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Fill tag engraving with black enamel. 2. Plastic Laminate Valve Tags: Provide 3/32"thick engraved plastic laminate valve tags,with piping system abbreviations in 1/4"high letters and sequenced valve number 1/2"high,and with 5/32"hole for fasteners. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 13117 SECTION 22 05 00- 12 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 3. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide solid brass chain(wire link or beaded type),or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. 4. Non-potable Water Tags: 1/16"thick,engraved,plastic tags. D. Plastic Equipment Signs: 1. Provide 4-1/2"x 6"plastic laminate sign,ANSI A.13 color coded with engraved white core lettering. 2. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws,except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate. 3. Nomenclature: Include the following,matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible: a. Tag numbers. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Craftmark, Seton,Brady,Marking Services,Inc.,or Brimar. 2.7 ELECTRICAL A. General: 1. All electrical material,equipment,and apparatus specified herein shall conform to the requirements of Division 26. 2. Provide expanded metal or solid sheet metal guards on all V-belt drives to totally enclose the drive on all sides. Provide holes for tachometer readings. Support guards separately from rotating equipment. B. Quality Assurance: Electrical components and materials shall be UL or ETL listed/labeled as suitable for location and use-no exceptions. C. Low-Voltage Control Wiring: 1. General: 14 gauge,Type THHN, color coded, installed in conduit,where exposed or required by code. 2. Manufacturer: General Cable Corp.,Alcan Cable,American Insulated Wire Corp.,Senator Wire and Cable Co.,or Southwire Co. D. Disconnect Switches: Non-Fusible Switches: For equipment less than 1/2 horsepower, switch shall be horsepower rated;toggle switch type with thermal overload quantity of poles and voltage rating as required. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Workmanship shall be performed by licensed journeymen or master mechanics and shall result in an installation consistent with the best practices of trades. B. Install work uniform,level and plumb,in relationship to lines of building. Avoid any diagonal,or otherwise irregular work. C. All equipment will meet the requirements of this Division. Table of Contents is included to show future submissions. D. Where possible,all plumbing utilities shall be routed within the beam/joist space. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 13117 SECTION 22 05 00- 13 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. Follow manufacturers'directions and recommendations in all cases where the manufacturers of articles used on this Contract furnish directions covering points not covered in these Specifications. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the work between the various Plumbing Sections and with the work specified under other Divisions. If any cooperative work must be altered due to lack of proper supervision or failure to make proper and timely provisions,the alternations shall be made to the satisfaction of the Engineer of Record and at the Contractor's cost. B. Inspect all material, equipment, and apparatus upon delivery and do not install any damaged or defected materials. 3.4 ROOF CURBS,EQUIPMENT RAILS,PIPE PORTALS A. Install per manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate with other trades so units are installed when roofing is being installed. C. Verify roof insulation thickness and adjust raise of cant to match. 3.5 VIBRATION CONTROL ISOLATORS A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units except as otherwise indicated. Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by ASHRAE,of vibration isolation materials and units where not otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration control materials and units except as otherwise indicated. Adjust to ensure that units have equal deflection,do not bottom out under loading,and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices intended for temporary support during installation. C. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces,and as indicated. D. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where substrate is not level. E. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS A. General: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation,painting,or other covering or finish,including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces,install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. B. Piping System Identification: 1. Install pipe markers on each system indicated to receive identification,and include arrows to show normal direction of flow.Note pipe markers do not need to be install where piping is concealed in inaccessible areas.Valve tagging will suffice where piping and valving is behind access panels. 2. Locate pipe markers as follows: a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch,excluding short take-offs for fixtures;mark each pipe at branch,where there could be question of flow pattern. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 13117 SECTION 22 05 00- 14 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures. d. At access doors,manholes,and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. f. Spaced horizontally at maximum spacing of 20'along each piping run,with minimum of one in each room. Vertically spaced at each story transversed. C. Underground Piping Identification: During backfilling/topsoiling of each exterior underground piping system, install continuous underground-type plastic line marker,located directly over buried line at 6"to 8"below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in common trench and do not exceed overall width of 16",install single line marker. D. Mechanical Equipment Identification: Locate engraved plastic laminate signs on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device. Provide signs for the following: 1. Main control and operating valves,including safety devices. 2. Pumps,compressors and similar motor-driven units. 3. Hot water system mixing valves and similar equipment. 4. Boilers,heat exchangers and similar equipment. 5. Tanks and pressure vessels. 6. Strainers,filters,treatment systems and similar equipment. E. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit,provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements,indicate safety and emergency precautions,and warn of hazards and improper operations. Equipment signs shall include an identification of the area or other equipment served by the equipment being labeled. F. Gas pressure regulators shall have metal tags attached stating,"Warning: 2 lbs.upstream natural gas pressure. Do not remove." 3.7 TESTING A. Provide all tests specified hereinafter and as otherwise required. Provide all test equipment,including test pumps,gauges,instruments,and other equipment required. Test all rotational equipment for proper direction of rotation. Upon completion of testing,certify to the Architect,in writing,that the specified tests have been performed and that the installation complies with the specified requirements and provide a report of the test observations signed by qualified inspector. END OF SECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—PLUMBING 13117 SECTION 22 05 00- 15 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS A. All work under this Section shall comply with the requirements of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements, and shall include all Sections specified herein. B. Contractor to incorporate electrical requirements from: 1. Architectural and interior design drawings and specifications. 2. Plumbing,Fire Protection and Electrical drawings and specifications. C. Contractor shall reference existing design documents,including: 1. Original 1969 design documents. 2. 1973 Addition documents. 3. 1977 Addition documents. 1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements of Division 01. This is a design and construct contract where the contractor shall provide permit documents for the following systems; HVAC - Package rooftop units, core supply/return ductwork in open office area,toilet exhaust fans controls. B. Architectural: The preliminary program includes the renovation of the existing 1970's era office building in two phases. Phase I will focus on the demolition and reconstruction of the core elements of the building and Phase II will include completion of tenant specific improvements. The renovations will include the following building elements: 1. Main lobby. 2. Open office with exposed ceiling—base infrastructure. C. Design/Build: 1. The Contractor shall provide ongoing design dialog to include engineered drawings for submittals to the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ),Architect and Owner for review and comment. 2. All design drawings will be prepared in AutoCAD 2012 or a similar drafting software. All programs must interface with Architectural drafting program. 3. It is expected that the Contractor shall provide a total of two sets of design drawings for review and comment by the Owner and the Architect. a. One set of design drawings will be submitted at approximately 100%Design Development. 1) These shall be coordinated and up to date with the other trades/contractors. This shall include but not be limited to: a) Architectural Design. b) Plumbing Contractor. c) Fire Sprinkler Contractor. d) Electrical Contractor. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 13117 SECTION 23 05 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC b. The second set of design drawings shall be submitted at 75% Construction Documents or Permit submission. 1) These drawings shall be coordinated as noted above. D. Package Rooftop Units: 1. Provide ultra high efficiency package rooftop units with gas heating, tonnage as indicated on drawing M201. Units shall be McQuay Rebel. a. Provide alternate pricing for high efficiency package rooftop unit with gas heating for Owner review. b. Manufacturers to be considered shall include McQuay, Trane, Carrier, and Aaon. Other manufacturers require prior approval from Owner before submitting alternate pricing. 2. Provide supply air and return air ductwork from packaged rooftop units. General arrangement shall be consistent with layout indicated on drawing M200. a. Supply air ductwork shall be spiral round, neat in appearance for exposure during tenant improvement phase. 3. Provide Bacnet compatible HVAC control system for remote access and monitoring by Owner. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. Summary of Work: 1. Documents to be provided for review and to AHJ: a. Mechanical plans at 1/8"=1' scale. b. Load calculations c. Mechanical code compliance documentation B. Specifications: Meet design requirements of attached Specifications that in general, describe quality and character of materials and equipment. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All Division 23 Mechanical sections included herein. B. Division 07: Thermal and Moisture Protection. 1. Flashing and sheet metal. 2. Sealants and caulking. 3. Firestopping. C. Division 09: Painting: 1. Division 23 installers shall perform all painting, except where specifically stated otherwise in Division 09. 2. Painting of all exposed ductwork,insulation,equipment and materials BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 13117 SECTION 23 05 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC D. Division 10: Miscellaneous Metals. 1. Exterior louvers and grilles shall be included in this Section. E. Division 26: Electrical is related to work of: 1. Power connections to all mechanical equipment. 2. Fire protection alarms and relays. 3. Smoke detector and monitoring. 4. Life Safety Systems. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The Contractor is cautioned that code requirements not explicitly detailed in these specifications,but which may be reasonably inferred or implied from the nature of the project,must be provided as part of the contract. B. Perform all tests required by governing authorities and required under all Division 23 Sections. Provide written reports on all tests. C. Electrical devices and wiring shall conform to the latest standards of NEC; all devices shall be UL listed and labeled. D. All mechanical work shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA). E. Building Codes enforced by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in Oregon: 1. 2010 Oregon Structural Specialty Code(OSSC)based on 2009 International Building Code(IBC). 2. 2010 Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code(OMSC). 3. 2008 Oregon Plumbing Code (OPC) based on 2006 Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with State Amendments. 4. 2010 Oregon Fire Code(Based on the 2009 International Fire Code). 5. 2008 Oregon Electric Specialty Code(Based on the 2008 National Electric Code(NEC)with State Amendments. F. Provide in accordance with appropriate referenced standards of the following: 1. NFPA-National Fire Protection Association. 2. AABC-Associated Air Balance Council. 3. CSA-Canadian Standards Association. 4. ADC-Air Diffuser Council. 5. AMCA-Air Moving and Conditioning Association. 6. ANSI-American National Standards Institute. 7. ARI-Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute. 8. ASHRAE-American Society of Heating,Refrigerating&Air Conditioning Engineers. 9. ASME-American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 10. ASTM-American Society for Testing Materials. 11. AWS-American Welding Society. 12. FM-Factory Mutual. 13. MSS-Manufacturer's Standardization Society. 14. NEMA-National Electrical Manufacturer's Association. 15. SMACNA-Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. 16. UL-Underwriters Laboratories. 17. ADA-Americans with Disabilities Act. 18. ETL-Electrical Testing Laboratories. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 13117 SECTION 23 05 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Nameplates: Nameplates on manufactured items shall be aluminum or Type 304 stainless steel sheet, not less than 20 USG (0.0375"), riveted or bolted to the manufactured item, with nameplate data engraved or punched to form a non-erasable record of equipment data. B. Current Models. All work shall be as follows: 1. Manufactured items furnished shall be the current,cataloged product of the manufacturer. 2. Replacement parts shall be readily available and stocked in the USA. C. Experience: Unless more stringent requirements are specified in other sections of Division 23, manufactured items shall have been installed and used, without modification, renovation or repair, on other projects for not less than one year prior to the date of bidding for this project. 1.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Examine all existing conditions at building site. B. Review contract documents and technical specifications for extent of new work to be provided. C. Provide and pay for all permits,licenses,fees and inspections. D. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the fmal location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. This work shall include furnishing and installing all access doors required for mechanical access. E. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. Refer to Equipment Specifications in Divisions 02 through 48 for rough-in requirements. F. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components. G. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. H. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. I. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components,as they are constructed. J. Sequence,coordinate,and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. K. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of mechanical equipment and materials. Contractor to provide for all cutting and patching required for installation of his work unless otherwise noted. L. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. M. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,without interference with other installations. N. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceilings with ductwork,piping, conduits,suspension system,light fixtures,cable trays,sprinkler piping and heads,and other installations. O. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. P. Coordinate with Owner in advance to schedule shutdown of existing systems to make new connections. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 13117 SECTION 23 05 00-4 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC Q. All materials (such as insulation, ductwork, piping, wiring, controls, etc.) located within air plenum spaces, air shafts, and occupied spaces shall have a flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke- developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255)Method. In addition, the products, when tested, shall not drip flame particles, and flame shall not be progressive. Provide Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.,label or listing,or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing laboratory to prove the fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do not exceed those specified. R. Coordinate installation of floor drains and floor sinks with work of other trades, such that fmished floor slopes to drains and floor sinks are flush with surrounding floor. S. Products made of or containing lead, asbestos, mercury or other known toxic or hazardous materials are not acceptable for installation under this Division. Any such products installed as part of the work of the Division shall be removed and replaced and all costs for removal and replacement shall be borne solely by the installing Contractor. 1.8 DESIGN CRITERIA A. HVAC Criteria: 1. Indoor Summer Design Temperature: 72°F,50%relative humidity;60°F night setback. 2. Indoor Winter Design Temperature: 70°F,30%minimum relative humidity;60°F night setback. 3. Outdoor Summer Design Temperature: 90°F db/68°F wb. 4. Outdoor Winter Design Temperature: 17°F. 5. Lighting Load:0.8.watt/sq. ft. 6. Power Load(where applicable): 1.5 watts/sq.ft. 7. Glass Factors: Confirm these values with the architectural drawings. 8. Prepare load calculations in accordance with ASHRAE Fundamentals using Trane TRACE,Trane 600 or 700,Carrier E-20,or ELITE computer load calculation programs. 9. Provide a minimum of 10% safety factor between system load calculations and equipment selections. 10. Size low pressure ductwork using equal friction method with 0.08"wg pressure loss per 100 ft. 11. Select grilles and registers for NC-25 or less,with air distribution that will result in air velocities which do not exceed 50 FPM in the occupied zone. 12. Provide outside air based on UBC Table 10-A for occupant load factor and Table 12-A for outdoor air requirements. Note special allowances made for outside air in the 1996 Oregon Amendments. 13. Provide the following minimum supply air volumes or air volumes derived from load calculations, whichever is greater: a. Exterior spaces: 1 CFM per sq.ft. b. Interior spaces: 0.8 CFM per sq. ft. 1.9 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Contractor shall certify the following items are correct when using substituted products other than those suggested: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. 2. The Contractor shall pay for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, structural supports,and construction costs caused by proposed substitution. 3. The proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts available locally are readily obtainable for the proposed substitute. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 13117 SECTION 23 05 00-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC B. The Contractor further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to specified item. C. The Contractor agrees that the terms and conditions for the substituted product that are found in the contract documents apply to this proposed substitution. 1.10 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS A. The Contractors shall prepare coordinated Shop Drawings to coordinate the installation and location of all HVAC equipment, ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, fire sprinlders, lights, audio/video systems, electrical services and all system appurtenances. The Drawings shall include all mechanical rooms and floor plans. The Drawings shall be Overlay Drawings showing each discipline on a single sheet. The Drawings shall be keyed to the structural column identification system, and shall be progressively numbered. Prior to completion of the Drawings,the Contractor shall coordinate the proposed installation with the Architect and the structural requirements,and all other trades(including HVAC,Plumbing,Fire Protection,Electrical,Ceiling Suspension,and Tile Systems),and provide reasonable maintenance access requirements. When conflicts are identified, modify system layout as necessary to resolve. Do not fabricate, order or install any equipment or materials until coordination documents are approved by the General Contractor, Architect, and Owner. Within thirty (30) days after award of Contract, submit proposed coordination document Shop Drawing schedule, allowing adequate time for review and approval by parties mentioned above. Drawings should be prepared and submitted for approval on a floor-by-floor basis to phase with building construction. B. The Drawings shall be prepared as follows: 1. The Sheet Metal(Mechanical)Contractor shall prepare Drawings to an accurate scale of 1/8"= 1'- 0" or larger, on AutoCAD disks. Obtain AutoCAD files of the architectural design from the Architect. Output Drawings are to be same size as Architectural Drawings and shall indicate location, size and elevation above fmished floor,of all HVAC equipment, ductwork, and piping. Plans shall also indicate proposed ceiling grid and lighting layout,as shown on electrical plans and reflected ceiling plans. 2. The Plumbing Contractor shall obtain reproducible plans or AutoCAD disks from the Mechanical Contractor, and indicate all plumbing lines including fittings, hangers, access panels, valves, and bottom of pipe elevations above finished floor. 3. The Fire Protection Contractor shall obtain reproducible plans with the detailed mechanical and plumbing work shown. The Sprinkler Contractor shall indicate location of all sprinkler heads and piping,including valves and fittings,dimensions from column lines,and bottom of pipe elevations above finished floor. 4. Plans are to incorporate all addenda items and change orders. 5. Distribute plans to all trades and provide additional coordination as needed. C. Advise the Architect in the event a conflict occurs in the location or connection of equipment. Bear all costs for relocation of equipment, resulting from failure to properly coordinate the installation or failure to advise the Architect of conflict. D. Provide means of access to all valves, dampers, controllers, operable devices, and other apparatus that may require adjustment or servicing. E. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding all existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise the Architect of any discrepancies between those indicated on the Drawings and those existing in the field prior to any installation related thereto. F. Final Coordination Drawings with all appropriate information added are to be submitted as Record Drawings at completion of project. G. Provide copy of Record Drawings to Testing and Balancing Contractor for their use when doing their work. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 13117 SECTION 23 05 00-6 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Before commencing installation, print out an extra set of prints, marked "Record." Keep this set of Drawings at the job site at all times, and use it for no other purpose but to mark on it all the changes and revisions to the Construction Drawings resulting from coordination with other trades. At the completion of the project, 1. Edit project AutoCAD files to incorporate all site markups,changes,and revisions to the Contract Drawings. Submit plots of Record Drawings and six copies CD Rom(s) labeled with all record drawings and AutoCAD drawing files. B. Provide copy of Record Drawings to Testing and Balancing Contractor for use when doing his work. C. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork,size and location both exterior and interior, including locations of coils, dampers and other control devices, filters,boxes and similar units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping systems,with valves and control devices located and numbered,concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e. — valves, traps, strainers, expansion compensators,tanks,etc.);Change Orders;concealed control system devices. D. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders; actual equipment and materials used. E. Refer also to Special Conditions in Division 01 for full scope of requirements. 1.12 START-UP SERVICE AND BUILDING COMMISSIONING A. Prior to start-up,be assured that systems are ready, including checking the following: Proper equipment rotation, proper wiring, auxiliary connections, lubrication, venting, controls, and installed and properly set relief and safety valves. B. Provide services of factory-trained technicians for start-up of air conditioning units,temperature controls, and other major pieces of equipment. Certify in writing compliance with this Paragraph,stating names of personnel involved and the date work was performed. C. Provide certificates of calibration for all sensors required for control and monitoring including temperature and pressure. D. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for additional requirements. 1.13 INSTRUCTION,MAINTENANCE,AND O&M MANUALS A. O&M Manuals: Upon completion of the work,and prior to training of Owner's personnel,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect complete set of operating instructions, maintenance instructions, part lists, and all other bulletins and brochures pertinent to the operation and maintenance for equipment furnished and installed as specified in this section,bound in a durable binder. Refer to Division 01. B. Contractor shall be responsible for providing proper instruction of the of Owner's personnel for operation and maintenance of equipment, and apparatus installed as specified in Division 23 to be no less than two hours for each piece of equipment. The Contractor shall develop and submit training materials prior to this training. These materials shall include qualifications of the trainer, training agenda, learning objectives, and a written test to be administered at the end of the training session. Operation and Maintenance manuals must present,incorporated and referenced in the training sessions. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 13117 SECTION 23 05 00-7 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 1.14 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment,storage,and handling. B. Store equipment and materials in an environmentally controlled area at the site,unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage. Piping shall be stored in bundles covered with visqueen. Piping showing signs of rust shall be removed from site and replaced. C. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations. 1.15 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Furnish approved operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the technical sections for use by operation personnel. The operating instructions shall include wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and equipment. Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. Attach or post operating instructions adjacent to each principal system and equipment including start-up, operating, shutdown, safety precautions and procedure in the event of equipment failure. Provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures for operating instructions exposed to the weather. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal. 1.16 CLEANING AND CLOSING A. All work shall be inspected,tested,and approved before being concealed or placed in operation. B. Upon completion of the work, all equipment installed as specified in this section, and all areas where work was performed,shall be cleaned to provide operating conditions satisfactory to the Architect. 1.17 WARRANTIES A. All equipment shall be provided with a minimum one-year warranty to include parts and labor. Refer to individual Equipment Specifications for extended or longer-term warranty requirements. B. Provide complete warranty information for each item,to include product or equipment,date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. C. Service during warranty period: Contractor shall provide maintenance as specified elsewhere during the 12-month warranty period. 1.18 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor shall guarantee and service all workmanship and materials to be as represented by him and shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any part thereof which may become defective within the period of one (1) year after the Date of Final Acceptance, ordinary wear and tear excepted. B. Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for any damages caused by or resulting from defects in his work. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 13117 SECTION 23 05 00-8 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Furnish and install all new material, equipment, and apparatus hereinafter specified unless specifically noted otherwise. All material, equipment, and apparatus shall be identified by the manufacturer's name, nameplate,and pertinent data. B. All materials, equipment, and apparatus are mentioned as standards unless noted otherwise. The words "or approved equal"shall be considered to be subsequent to all manufacturers' names used herein,unless specifically noted that substitutes are not allowed. C. All equipment will meet the requirements of this Division. Table of Contents is included to show future submissions. 2.2 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. General: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors,including,but not limited to,the following: 1. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products,which are UL listed and FM approved. 2. ASCE 7-05:"American Society of Civil Engineers." 3. 2006 International Building Code(IBC) 4. MSS Standard Compliance: Manufacturer's Standardization Society(MSS). 5. SMACNA: "Seismic Restraint Manual:Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." 6. NFPA: Pamphlet number 13 and 14 for fire protection systems. 7. Provide copper plated or plastic coated supports and attachment for copper piping systems. Field applied coatings or tape is unacceptable. 8. Manufacturer: B-Line,Anvil International,Michigan,Tolco,Kin-Line,Simpson,or Superstrut. 2.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINTNIBRATION ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment, piping, ductwork and all system appurtenances (including weight of normal operating contents) shall be adequately restrained to resist seismic forces. Restraint devices shall be designed and selected to meet seismic requirements as defined in the latest edition of the IBC,with State Amendments, and applicable local codes and the applicable Importance Factors and Soil Factors. B. All anchorages and/or seismic restraints shall be designed by a registered professional Civil or Structural Engineer licensed in the state of the project. Design shall include: 1. Number, size and location of anchors for floor or roof-mounted equipment. For curb mounted equipment,provide design of attachment of both the unit to the curb and the curb to the structure. 2. Number, size and location of vibration isolators, seismic restraint devices and their anchorage for vibration-isolated and suspended equipment. 3. Number, size and location of braces and anchors for suspended piping and ductwork on shop drawings. a. The contractor must select a single seismic restraint system pre-designed to meet the requirements of the current version of the IBC with State Amendments. b. Installations not addressed by the selected system must be designed,detailed and submitted along with the shop drawings. c. Maximum seismic loads shall be indicated on drawings at each brace location. d. Drawings shall bear the stamp and signature of the registered professional engineer licensed in the state of the project who designed the layout of the braces. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD- HVAC 13117 SECTION 23 05 00-9 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 2.4 ACCESS PANELS AND ACCESS DOORS A. Provide all access doors and panels to serve equipment under this work, including those which must be installed, in finished architectural surfaces. Frame of 16-gauge steel, door of 20 gauge steel. 1" flange width,continuous piano hinge,key operated,prime coated. Refer to Architectural Specifications for the required product Specification for each surface. Contractor is to submit schedule of access panels for approval. Exact size,number and location of access panels is not shown on Plans. Access doors shall be of a size to permit removal of equipment for servicing. Access door shall have same rating as the wall or ceiling in which it is mounted. Provide access panel for each trap primer or concealed valve, for fire and combination fire/smoke dampers, and for volume dampers. Use no panel smaller than 12" x 12" for simple manual access, or smaller than 24" x 24" where personnel must pass through. Provide cylinder lock for access door serving mixing or critical valves in public areas. B. Included under this work is the responsibility for verifying the exact location and type of each access panel or door required to serve equipment under this work and in the proper sequence to keep in tune with construction and with prior approval of the Architect. Access doors in fire rated partitions and ceilings shall carry all label ratings as required to maintain the rating of the rated assembly. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Milcor,Karp,Nystrom,or Elmdor/Stoneman. D. Submit markup of architectural plans showing size and location of access panels required for equipment access for approval by Architect. 2.5 ELECTRICAL A. General: 1. All electrical material, equipment, and apparatus specified herein shall conform to the requirements of Division 26. 2. Provide all motors for equipment specified herein. Provide motor starters, controllers, and other electrical apparatus and wiring which are required for the operation of the equipment specified herein. 3. Set and align all motors and drives in equipment specified herein. 4. Provide expanded metal or solid sheet metal guards on all V-belt drives to totally enclose the drive on all sides. Provide holes for tachometer readings. Support guards separately from rotating equipment. 5. Provide for all rotating shafts, couplings, etc., a solid sheet metal, inverted "U" cover over the entire length of the exposed shaft and support separately from rotating equipment. Cover shall extend to below the bottom of the shaft and coupling,and shall meet the requirements of the State Industrial Safety Regulations. 6. Specific electrical requirements (i.e., horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical equipment. B. Quality Assurance: Electrical components and materials shall be UL or ETL listed/labeled as suitable for location and use-no exceptions. C. Motors: 1. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors, more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment Specifications. 2. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads. 3. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range. Unless otherwise noted on plans,all motors'A HP or larger shall be rated for 208 or 460 volt,3-phase,operation. Unless otherwise noted on plans,all motors less than 1/2 HP shall be rated for 120 volt,single phase operation. 4. Temperature Rating: Motor meets class B rise with class F insulation. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 13117 SECTION 23 05 00- 10 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 5. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors. 6. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design "B", except"C"where required for high starting torque. a. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 56;use driven equipment manufacturer's standards to suit specific application. b. VFD driven motors to be provided rated for inverter duty(NEMA Standard MG-1,Part 31) and equipped with a shaft grounding device or as an insulated bearing motor. c. Bearings: 1) Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals. 2) Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular maintenance. 3) Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives product lateral or axial thrust in motor. 4) For fractional horsepower,light duty motors,sleeve type bearings are permitted. 5) Enclosure Type: a) Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation. b) Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants. c) Weather protected Type I for outdoor use,Type II where not housed. d. Overload Protection: Built-in thermal overload protection where external overload protection is not provided and, where indicated, internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter. e. Noise Rating: "Quiet." f. Efficiency: 1) Motors shall meet the NEMA premium efficiency standard g. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction,special features and similar information. D. Starters and Electrical Devices: 1. Motor Starter Characteristics: a. Enclosures: NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, except in wet locations shall be NEMA 3R with conduit hubs. b. Type and size of starter shall be as recommended by motor manufacturer and the driven equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition. 2. Manual switches shall have pilot lights and all required switch positions for multi-speed motors. Overload Protection: Melting alloy or bi-metallic type thermal overload relays,sized according to actual operating current(field measured). 3. Magnetic Starters: a. Heavy duty, oil resistant, hand-off-auto (HOA), or as indicated, and pilot lights,properly arranged for single speed or multi-speed operation as indicated. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 13117 SECTION 23 05 00- 11 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC b. Trip-free thermal overload relays, each phase, sized according to actual operating current (field measured). c. Interlocks, pneumatic switches and similar devices as required for coordination with control requirements of Division 23 Controls sections. d. Built-in primary and secondary fused control circuit transformer, supplied from load side of equipment disconnect. e. Externally operated manual reset. f. Under-voltage release or protection for all motors over 20 hp. 4. Motor Connections: Liquid tight, flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords are specifically indicated. E. Low Voltage Control Wiring: 1. General: 14 gauge,Type THHN,color coded,installed in conduit. 2. Manufacturer: General Cable Corp.,Alcan Cable,American Insulated Wire Corp., Senator Wire and Cable Co.,or Southwire Co. F. Disconnect Switches: 1. Fusible Switches: For equipment 1/2 HP or larger, provide fused, each phase; heavy duty; horsepower rated; spring loaded quick-make, quick-break mechanism; dead front line side shield; solderless lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors; spring reinforced fuse clips; electro silver plated current carrying parts; hinged doors; operating lever arranged for locking in the "OPEN"position;arc quenchers;capacity and characteristics as indicated. 2. Non-Fusible Switches: For equipment less than 1/2 horsepower,switch shall be horsepower rated; toggle switch type with thermal overload quantity of poles and voltage rating as required. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Workmanship shall be performed by licensed journeymen or master mechanics and shall result in an installation consistent with the best practices of trades. B. Install work uniform,level and plumb,in relationship to lines of building. Do not install any diagonal,or otherwise irregular work unless so indicated. C. All equipment will meet the requirements of this Division. Table of Contents is included to show future submissions. D. Where possible,all mechanical utilities shall be routed within the beam/joist space. 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. Follow manufacturers' directions and recommendations in all cases where the manufacturers of articles used on this Contract furnish directions covering points not covered in these Specifications. 1. If the contractor must deviate from the manufacturer's recommendations provide a letter from the manufacturer indicating the clearance to be provided is acceptable for scheduled performance and maintenance. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 13117 SECTION 23 05 00- 12 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the work between the various Mechanical Sections and with the work specified under other Divisions. If any cooperative work must be altered due to lack of proper supervision or failure to make proper and timely provisions,the alternations shall be made to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at the Contractor's cost. Coordinate wall and ceiling work with the General Contractor,and his subcontractors in locating ceiling air outlets,wall registers,etc. B. Inspect all material, equipment, and apparatus upon delivery and do not install any damaged or defected materials. 3.4 ROOF CURBS,EQUIPMENT RAILS,PIPE PORTALS A. Install per manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate with other trades so units are installed when roofing is being installed. C. Verify roof insulation thickness and adjust raise of cant to match. 3.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with Division 26 work to provide complete systems as required to operate all mechanical devices installed under this Division of work. B. Installation of Electrical Connections: Furnish, install, and wire (except as may be otherwise indicated) all heating, ventilating, air conditioning, etc., motors and controls in accordance with the following schedule and in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with applicable requirements of UL,NEC, and NECA's"Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements. Carefully coordinate with work performed under the Mechanical Division of these Specifications. C. Division 23 has responsibilities for electrically powered or controlled mechanical equipment which is specified in Division 23 Specifications. The specific division of responsibilities between Division 23 and 26 for furnishing or wiring this equipment is as follows: 1. Division 23 Mechanical Responsibilities: a. MOTORS: Furnish and install all motors necessary for mechanical equipment. b. MAGNETIC STARTERS: Furnish all magnetic starters whether manually or automatically controlled which are necessary for mechanical equipment. Furnish these starters with all control relays or transformers necessary to interface with mechanical controls. If the starter is factory installed on a piece of Division 23 equipment,also furnish and install the power wiring between starter and motor. c. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: Provide all VFD's associated with mechanical equipment. If the drive is installed on a piece of factory assembled equipment the wiring between motor and drive is to be provided as part of the factory equipment. d. DISCONNECTS: Provide the disconnects which are part of factory wired Division 23 equipment. Factory wiring to include wiring between motor and disconnect or combination starter/disconnect. e. CONTROLS: Division 23 Contractor(including the temperature controls subcontractor)is responsible for the following equipment in its entirety. This equipment includes but is not limited to the following: 1) Control relays necessary for controlling Division 23 equipment. 2) Control transformers necessary for providing power to controls for Division 23 equipment. 3) Line voltage thermostats. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 13117 SECTION 23 05 00- 13 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 4) Low or non-load voltage control components. 5) Remote bulb thermostats. 6) Non-life safety related valve or damper actuators. 7) Float switches. f. FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY EQUIPMENT: 1) Fire/Smoke Dampers: Division 23 is responsible for providing and physically installing the damper and for installing any required control interface wiring to Division 23 controls. a) Where these dampers are not part of an integrated area wide smoke detection system, Division 23 is responsible for providing each fire/smoke damper with a dedicated duct detector installed per the requirements of the building code. (See Section 233113). If not integral with the damper assembly, the detector is to be installed by Div. 23 but wired for damper control by Div. 26. 2) Fire Sprinkler System: Division 23 is responsible for providing necessary controls including flow switches and alarm bells. 3.6 VIBRATION AND DYNAMIC BALANCING A. Vibration tolerances shall be as specified by the"International Research and Development Corporation", Worthington,Ohio,measured by the displacement,peak to peak,as follows: 1. All Fans: Below severity chart labeled"FAIR",maximum velocity of 0.0785 in/sec,peak. B. Correction shall be made to all equipment, which exceeds vibration tolerances specified above. Final vibration levels shall be reported as described above. 3.7 TESTING A. Provide all tests specified hereinafter and as otherwise required. Provide all test equipment,including test pumps, gauges, instruments, and other equipment required. Test all rotational equipment for proper direction of rotation. Upon completion of testing, certify to the Architect, in writing, that the specified tests have been performed and that the installation complies with the specified requirements and provide a report of the test observations signed by qualified inspector. B. Ductwork: Test all air quantities as specified in Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. Pressure tests per SMACNA. C. Registers and Diffusers: Test for proper operation of manually operated control feature. Test all air quantities as specified in Section 230593—Testing,Adjusting and Balancing. D. Ductwork Specialties: Test all operable ductwork specialties for proper operation. Check all fire,smoke and fire/smoke dampers to ensure that they are 100%open. E. Temperature Control: Test all control functions to assure that all systems are controlling as specified or as otherwise necessary and that all controls are adjusted to maintain proper room temperatures. The manufacturer's representative shall perform all tests. END OF SECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD-HVAC 13117 SECTION 23 05 00- 14 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS A. All work under this Section shall comply with the requirements of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements, and shall include all Sections specified herein. B. Contractor to incorporate electrical requirements from: 1. Architectural and interior design drawings and specifications. 2. Mechanical,Plumbing and Fire Protection drawings and specifications. C. Contractor shall reference existing design documents,including: 1. Original 1969 design documents. 2. 1973 Addition documents. 3. 1977 Addition documents. 1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements of Division 01. This is a design and construct contract where the contractor shall provide permit documents for the following systems;Electrical,Lighting,Telephone,Data,CATV,Access control and Fire Alarm. B. Architectural: The preliminary program includes the renovation of the existing 1970's era office building in two phases. Phase I will focus on the demolition and reconstruction of the core elements of the building and Phase II will include completion of tenant specific improvements. The renovations will include the following building elements: 1. Main lobby. 2. Open office with exposed ceiling—base infrastructure. 3. Ceiling treatments and interior lighting. C. Design/Build: 1. The Contractor shall provide ongoing design dialog to include engineered drawings for submittals to the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ),Architect and Owner for review and comment. 2. All design drawings will be prepared in AutoCAD 2012 or a similar drafting software. All programs must interface with Architectural drafting program. 3. It is expected that the Contractor shall provide a total of two sets of design drawings for review and comment by the Owner and the Architect. a. One set of design drawings will be submitted at approximately 100%Design Development. 1) These shall be coordinated and up to date with the other trades/contractors. This shall include but not be limited to: a) Architectural Design. b) Mechanical Contractor. c) Plumbing Contractor. d) Fire Sprinkler Contractor. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL 13117 SECTION 26 05 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL b. The second set of design drawings shall be submitted at 75% Construction Documents or Permit submission. 1) These drawings shall be coordinated as noted above. D. Electrical Service: Utility Service: The existing pad vault mounted utility transformer and meter enclosure in the site service yard is to be maintained. The existing 3000A, 208/120V, 3 PH, 4W Main Distribution Panel in the Mechanical/Electrical Room on the ground level of the building's west side will remain the point of service for the building. E. Electrical Distribution: 1. House: New house panelboards will be provided for house services and to serve common core building loads if existing panels do not have sufficient capacity.New panels would be connected to the existing MDP. New branch circuiting will be provided to core area lighting, receptacles, mechanical equipment,building equipment and to re-feed existing site lighting. 2. Tenant Spaces: Tenant will provide raceways and feeder from the tenant space back to existing MDP. Tenant will provide power panel in their own space to service all loads for their space including mechanical equipment dedicated to serving their space. Tenant will be allowed to use the existing Walker duct in floor slab distribution system for power and telecom that is within their spaces to avoid overhead feeds to their space. Main ducts run north&south and branch ducts run east and west. Branch ducts are approximately 6 feet on center with activation presets every 2 feet. 3. Emergency Power: a. Existing generator and emergency distribution equipment will be removed. b. Life safety loads(egress lighting and fire alarm system)will be provided with battery back- up. c. Design build contractor shall provide egress lighting calcs with the permit set if required to prove compliance with the AHJ's requirements for egress lighting levels. F. Coordination and Equipment Loads: 1. Division 21, 22 & 23 Equipment: Division 26 has responsibilities for electrically powered or controlled mechanical equipment which is specified in Division 22 & 23 Specifications or scheduled on Division 26 Drawings. The specific division of responsibilities between Division 22 &23 and 26 for furnishing or wiring this equipment is as follows: a. Division 26 Electrical Responsibilities: 1) MOTORS: Provide the power wiring for the motors. 2) MAGNETIC STARTERS: Except where magnetic starters are factory installed on Division 23 factory assembled equipment,Division 26 is to install magnetic starters furnished by Division 22 7 23 and install the necessary power wiring to the starter and from the starter to the motor. In the case of factory installed starters,Division 26 is to install the necessary power wiring to the starter. 3) VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: Physically mount all VFD's which are not specified to be installed on Division 23 factory assembled equipment. Provide the necessary power wiring to the VFD and from the VFD to the motor except in the case of factory installed VFD's where wiring between the motor and VFD is to be by Division 23. Where disconnects are installed between a VFD and a motor provide the interlocking wiring between the disconnect and VFD to insure that the drive is shutdown simultaneously with motor. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL 13117 SECTION 26 05 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL 4) DISCONNECTS: Provide all disconnects necessary for Division 23 mechanical equipment which are not provided as part of factory wired Division 23 equipment. Provide power wiring to all disconnects. In addition provide power wiring between motor and disconnect when the disconnect is not factory installed. See also Variable Frequency Drive above for special wiring requirements. 5) CONTROLS: Division 26 Contractor is responsible for providing power to control panels and control circuit outlets. b. Coordinate with Division 21,22&23 for power requirements of all mechanical equipment included in the project scope. 2. Miscellaneous Requirements - In addition to Division 23 mechanical equipment, elevator equipment, convenience outlets, and lighting, power connection will be provided for miscellaneous equipment included in the project scope. G. Lighting and Controls: Lighting for the project shall meet or exceed the Oregon State Energy Code. 1. Existing site lighting to remain where ever possible. Contractor to replace lamps, ballasts or fixtures as required to provide fully functional site lighting. 2. Common area lighting will use energy efficiency measures to reduce lighting during non-occupied times and daylight harvesting at windows. Coordinate system operation with architect and owner. 3. New lighting shall be provided in the core and common spaces. Coordinate lighting fixture selections with architect and owner. Lighting within the tenant space shall be the tenants' responsibility. 4. Contractor is responsible for submitting and installing lighting to meet or exceed the 2010 Oregon Energy Code. IES recommended lighting levels are to be: a. Lobbies/Reception 10 to 20 Foot-candles b. Corridors&Elevators Lobbies&Service Areas 10 to 20 Foot-candles c. Storage and Equipment Rooms 10 to 20 Foot-candles H. Fire Alarm System: 1. Provide an addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only. Include smoke detection, water flow detection, voice alarm and public address, fireman's telephone system, elevator capture and control, stairway and exit door unlocking, magnetic door holder release,and smoke control provisions to be coordinated with Division 22& 23. The system shall comply with the local AHJ's requirements and ADA. Provide spare capacity to accommodate future tenant build-outs. Fire alarm devices within the tenant space shall be the tenants' responsibility. 2. Provide updated battery calculations and provide battery cabinet with sufficient capacity to exceed system demands by 30%. 3. Coordinate location of Fire Alarm Remote Annunciation and device layouts with local AHJ and architect. Telecommunication: 1. Existing pathways for low voltage data, telephone, and CATV service will remain for tenant re- use. Existing copper and fiber are provided to the PBX room. All new franchise utilities to enter building at the existing PBX room which is located on ground level near the center of the building. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL 13117 SECTION 26 05 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL 2. Each Lobby spaces will be provided with: a. Provide connectivity outlets around the room to be located adjacent to the power receptacles. b. Provide one connectivity outlet located as directed by Architect for flat screen TV. J. Security System: Contractor to provide raceways and door contacts for future security system.Contractor to coordinate type of system desired with Owner and Architect. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. Summary of Work: 1. Documents to be provided for review and to AHJ: a. Power/Connectivity plans at 1/8"=1' scale. b. Lighting plans at 1/8"=1' scale. c. Enlarged plans for electrical room at 1/4"=1'. d. Fire Alarm plans at 1/8"=1'. e. Load calculations. B. Specifications: Meet design requirements of attached Specifications that in general,describe quality and character of materials and equipment. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All Division 26 Electrical specification sections included herein. B. Division 9: Painting: 1. Division 26 installers shall perform all painting, except where specifically stated otherwise in Division 9. 2. Painting of all exposed conduit,equipment and materials. C. Division 21,22&23: Mechanical is related to work of 1. Fire protection alarms and relays. 2. Smoke detector and monitoring. 3. Power connections to all mechanical equipment. 4. Life safety provisions. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The Contractor is cautioned that code requirements are not explicitly detailed in these specifications or drawings,but which may be reasonably inferred or implied from the nature of the project,must be provided as part of the contract. B. Perform all tests required by governing authorities and required under all Division 26 Sections. Provide written reports on all tests. C. Electrical devices and wiring shall conform to the latest standards of NEC; all devices shall be UL listed and labeled. D. All electrical work shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA). BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL 13117 SECTION 26 05 00-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL E. All excavation work must comply with all provisions of state laws including notification to all owners of underground utilities at least 48 business day hours, but not more than 10 business days, before commencing an excavation. F. Provide in accordance with rules and regulations of the following: 1. Building Codes enforced by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in Oregon: a. 2009 International Building Code(IBC)with State and local Amendments. b. 2009 International Electrical Code(IEC)with State and local Amendments. c. 2009 International Fire Code(IFC)with State and local Amendments. d. 2011 National Electrical Code(NEC). 2. Local,city,county and state codes and ordinances. 3. Local Bureau of Buildings. 4. Local and State Fire Prevention Districts. 5. State Administrative Codes. G. Provide in accordance with appropriate referenced standards of the following: 1. NFPA-National Fire Protection Association. 2. CSA-Canadian Standards Association. 3. ANSI-American National Standards Institute. 4. FM-Factory Mutual. 5. MSS-Manufacturer's Standardization Society. 6. NEMA-National Electrical Manufacturer's Association. 7. UL-Underwriters Laboratories. 8. ADA-Americans with Disabilities Act. 9. ETL-Electrical Testing Laboratories. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Current Models. All work shall be as follows: 1. Manufactured items furnished shall be the current,cataloged product of the manufacturer. 2. Replacement parts shall be readily available and stocked in the USA. B. Experience: Unless more stringent requirements are specified in other sections of Division 26, manufactured items shall have been installed and used, without modification, renovation or repair, on other projects for not less than one year prior to the date of bidding for this project. 1.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Examine all existing conditions at building site. B. Review contract documents and technical specifications for extent of new work to be provided. C. Provide and pay for all permits,licenses,fees and inspections. D. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the fmal location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. This work shall include furnishing and installing all access doors required for electrical access. E. Verify fmal locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. Refer to Equipment Specifications in Divisions 2 through 26 for rough-in requirements. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL 13117 SECTION 26 05 00-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL F. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components. G. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. H. Arrange for chases,slots,and openings in other building components to allow for electrical installations. I. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components,as they are constructed. J. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. K. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of electrical equipment and materials. Contractor to provide for all cutting and patching required for installation of his work unless otherwise noted. L. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install electrical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. M. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,without interference with other installations. N. Coordinate the installation of electrical materials and equipment above ceilings with ductwork, piping, conduits,suspension system,light fixtures,cable trays,sprinkler piping and heads,and other installations. O. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. P. Coordinate with Owner in advance to schedule shutdown of existing systems to make new connections. Q. All materials located within air plenum spaces,air shafts,and occupied spaces shall have a plenum rating or be installed as to meet the plenum rating requirements. Provide Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.,label or listing,or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing laboratory to prove the fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do not exceed those specified. R. Products made of or containing lead, asbestos, mercury or other known toxic or hazardous materials are not acceptable for installation under this Division. Any such products installed as part of the work of the Division shall be removed and replaced and all costs for removal and replacement shall be borne solely by the installing Contractor. S. Advise the Architect,in writing,in the event a conflict occurs in the location or connection of equipment. Bear all costs for relocation of equipment,resulting from failure to properly coordinate the installation or failure to advise the Architect of conflict. 1.8 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Contractor shall certify the following items are correct when using substituted products other than those scheduled or shown on the drawings as a basis of design: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. 2. The Contractor shall pay for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, structural supports,and construction costs caused by proposed substitution. 3. The proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts available locally are readily obtainable for the proposed substitute. B. The Contractor further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to specified item. C. The Contractor agrees that the terms and conditions for the substituted product that are found in the contract documents apply to this proposed substitution. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL 13117 SECTION 26 05 00-6 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL 1.9 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS A. The Contractors shall prepare coordinated Drawings to coordinate the electrical installation and location of all HVAC equipment, ductwork, grilles, diffusers,piping, fire sprinklers, lights, audio/video systems, electrical services and all system appurtenances. The Drawings shall include all electrical rooms and floor plans. The Drawings shall be keyed to the structural column identification system, and shall be progressively numbered. Prior to completion of the Drawings, the Contractor shall coordinate the proposed installation with the Architect and the structural requirements, and all other trades (including HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, Ceiling Suspension, and Tile Systems), and provide reasonable maintenance access requirements. When conflicts are identified, modify system layout as necessary to resolve. Do not order or install any equipment or materials until coordination documents are approved by the General Contractor, Architect, and Owner. Within thirty (30) days after award of Contract, submit proposed coordination document Shop Drawing schedule, allowing adequate time for review and approval by parties mentioned above. Drawings should be prepared and submitted for approval on a floor-by-floor basis to phase with building construction. B. The Drawings shall be prepared as follows: 1. The Electrical Contractor shall prepare Design Build Electrical drawings to an accurate scale of 1/8"= I'-0" or larger,on AutoCAD disks. Obtain AutoCAD files of the architectural design from the Architect. Output Drawings are to be same size as Architectural Drawings and shall indicate location, size and elevation above finished floor, of all electrical equipment, disconnects, transformers and lighting devices in relationship to all mechanical, plumbing and fire protection devices,ducts and piping. 2. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall obtain AutoCAD files with the detailed mechanical, plumbing and fire sprinkler work shown. 3. AutoCAD drawings are to incorporate all addenda items and change orders. 4. Distribute plans and AutoCAD drawings to all trades and provide additional coordination as needed. C. Advise the Architect in the event a conflict occurs in the location or connection of equipment. Bear all costs for relocation of equipment,resulting from failure to properly coordinate the installation or failure to advise the Architect of conflict. D. Provide means of access to all controllers,disconnects,panels,switchboards,J-Boxes,automatic transfer switches and other devices that require access or servicing. E. Verify in field exact size, location and clearances regarding all existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise the Architect of any discrepancies between those indicated on the Drawings and those existing in the field prior to any installation related thereto. F. Final AutoCAD files and Coordination Drawings with all appropriate information added are to be submitted as Record Drawings at completion of project. 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Before commencing installation, print out an extra set of prints, marked "Record." Keep this set of Drawings at the job site at all times, and use it for no other purpose but to mark on it all the changes and revisions to the Construction Drawings resulting from coordination with other trades. At the completion of the project, 1. Edit project AutoCAD files to incorporate all site markups,changes,and revisions to the Contract Drawings. Submit plots of Record Drawings and six copies CD Rom(s) labeled with all record drawings and AutoCAD drawing files. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL 13117 SECTION 26 05 00-7 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL B. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to conduit routing, size and location both exterior and interior; including locations of all panels,J-Boxes,transformers and other electrical devices;concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines;Change Orders;concealed control system devices. C. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders; actual equipment and materials used. D. Refer also to Special Conditions in Division 01 for full scope of requirements. 1.11 START-UP SERVICE AND BUILDING COMMISSIONING A. Prior to start-up,be assured that systems are ready, including checking the following: Proper equipment wiring,auxiliary connections and operation of lighting controls. B. Provide services for start-up of the following: 1. Lighting and Lighting Controls: Provide documentation of completion of start-up of lighting and operation within requirements of design documents. 1.12 INSTRUCTION,MAINTENANCE,AND O&M MANUALS A. O&M Manuals: Upon completion of the work,and prior to training of Owner's personnel,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect complete set of operating instructions, maintenance instructions, part lists, and all other bulletins and brochures pertinent to the operation and maintenance for equipment furnished and installed as specified in this section,bound in a durable binder. Refer to Division 1. B. Contractor shall be responsible for providing proper instruction of the of Owner's personnel,for operation and maintenance of equipment,and apparatus installed as specified in Division 26. The Contractor shall develop and submit training materials prior to this training.These materials shall include qualifications of the trainer, training agenda, learning objectives, and a written test to be administered at the end of the training session. Operation and Maintenance manuals must present, incorporated and referenced in the training sessions. 1.13 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment,storage,and handling. B. Store equipment and materials in an environmentally controlled area at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage. Piping shall be stored in bundles covered with visqueen. Piping showing signs of rust shall be removed from site and replaced. C. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations. 1.14 CLEANING AND CLOSING A. All work shall be inspected,tested,and approved before being concealed or placed in operation. B. Upon completion of the work, all equipment installed as specified in this section, and all areas where work was performed,shall be cleaned to provide operating conditions satisfactory to the Architect. 1.15 WARRANTIES A. All equipment shall be provided with a minimum one-year warranty to include parts and labor. Refer to individual Equipment Specifications for extended or longer-term warranty requirements. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL 13117 SECTION 26 05 00-8 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL B. Provide complete warranty information for each item, to include product or equipment,date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. C. Service during warranty period: Contractor shall provide maintenance as specified elsewhere during the 12-month warranty period. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor shall guarantee and service all workmanship and materials to be as represented by him and shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any part thereof which may become defective within the period of one (1) year after the Date of Final Acceptance, ordinary wear and tear excepted. B. Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for any damages caused by or resulting from defects in his work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Furnish and install all new material, equipment, and apparatus hereinafter specified unless specifically noted otherwise. All material, equipment, and apparatus shall be identified by the manufacturer's name, nameplate,and pertinent data. B. All materials, equipment, and apparatus are mentioned as standards unless noted otherwise. The words "or approved equal" shall be considered to be subsequent to all manufacturers' names used herein,unless specifically noted that substitutes are not allowed. 2.2 ELECTRICAL A. Quality Assurance: Electrical components and materials shall be UL or ETL listed/labeled as suitable for location and use-no exceptions. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Workmanship shall be performed by licensed journeymen electricians and shall result in an installation consistent with the best practices of trades. B. Install work uniform,level and plumb,in relationship to lines of building. Do not install any diagonal,or otherwise irregular work unless so indicated on Drawings or approved by Architect. 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. Follow manufacturers' directions and recommendations in all cases where the manufacturers of articles used on this Contract furnish directions covering points not shown on the Drawings or covered in these Specifications. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL 13117 SECTION 26 05 00-9 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the work between the various Electrical Sections and with the work specified under other Divisions. If any cooperative work must be altered due to lack of proper supervision or failure to make proper and timely provisions,the alternations shall be made to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at the Contractor's cost. Coordinate wall and ceiling work with the General Contractor, and his subcontractors in locating ceiling air outlets,wall registers,etc. B. Inspect all material,equipment,and apparatus upon delivery and do not install any damaged or defected materials. C. All exposed work under Division 26 shall receive either a factory finish or a field prime coat fmish D. All electrical material,equipment,and apparatus specified herein shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of Division 26. END OF SECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR DESIGN BUILD—ELECTRICAL 13117 SECTION 26 05 00- 10 PERMIT SET 11.06.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SITE CLEARING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing trees and other vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Removing above-and below-grade site improvements. 5. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. 1.3 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site and disposed of properly. B. Historic items, relics, and other items of interest or value to the Owner encountered during site clearing shall remain the Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located a minimum of 72 hours prior to site clearing. D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section"Earthwork." SITE CLEARING 13117 SECTION 31 10 00- 1 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SITE CLEARING 1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition,as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. 3.3 UTILITIES A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions,trees,shrubs,grass,and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. 1. Do not remove trees,shrubs,and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. SITE CLEARING 13117 SECTION 31 10 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SITE CLEARING 3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, and gutters at existing full-depth joints unless indicated otherwise. Neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain with vertical faces prior to removing existing pavement. 3.7 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material,unsuitable topsoil,obstructions,demolished materials,and waste materials including trash and debris,and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. END OF SECTION SITE CLEARING 13117 SECTION 31 10 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Subbase course for walks and pavements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation. B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving. C. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions changes in the Work. 2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect,shall be without additional compensation. E. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. F. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. G. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk. H. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation,or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase,drainage fill,or topsoil materials. I. Utilities: On-site underground pipes,conduits, ducts,and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. B. Site Information: Research public utility records and verify existing utility locations prior to ordering any material. Notify the Architect immediately if any discrepancies are found in the project survey. EARTHWORK 13117 SECTION 31 20 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON EARTHWORK PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension,debris,waste, frozen materials,vegetation,and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC,CL,ML,OL,CH,MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487,or a combination of these groups. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Subbase Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,crushed stone,and natural or crushed sand;ASTM D 2940;with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No.200 sieve. E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand;ASTM D 2940;with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No.200 sieve or use ODOT 1-1/2-inch-0-inch BASE AGGREGATE. F. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures,utilities,sidewalks,pavements,and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, freezing temperatures or frost, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. - B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing." C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls,which are specified in Division 31 Section"Site Clearing,"during earthwork operations. D. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. E. Protect subgrades from softening,undermining,washout,and damage by rain or water accumulation. 3.2 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives:Do not use explosives. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. EARTHWORK 13117 SECTION 31 20 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON EARTHWORK 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction,and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. 3.6 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade,and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.7 BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Backfill:Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly,but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing,and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 3.8 SOIL FILL A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas,use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements,use satisfactory soil material. 3.9 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 3 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy,frozen,or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 3 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. EARTHWORK 13117 SECTION 31 20 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON EARTHWORK 3.10 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations,and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. 4. For utility trenches,compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent. 3.11 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections,lines,and elevations indicated. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1/2-inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2-inch. 3.12 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud,frost,snow,or ice. B. On prepared subgrade,place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 2. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922,and ASTM D 2937,as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: EARTHWORK 13117 SECTION 31 20 00-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON EARTHWORK 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer,at least one test for every 2000 sq.ft.or less of paved area or building slab,but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet or less of wall length,but no fewer than two tests. 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and fmal backfill layer, at least one test for each 150 feet or less of trench length,but no fewer than two tests. E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded,rutted, settled,or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material,compact,and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.15 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris,and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION EARTHWORK 13117 SECTION 31 20 00-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cold milling of existing asphalt pavement. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 3. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 4. Pavement-marking paint. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 1. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work. 2. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work. B. Material Certificates: For each paving material,from manufacturer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of Section 00744 of the 2008 Oregon Standard Specifications for Construction for asphalt paving work. 1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this Section. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp,if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F and rising at time of placement. 3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement. B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean,dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials, 55 deg F for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F. ASPHALT PAVING 13117 SECTION 32 12 16- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ASPHALT PAVING PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATES A. Conform to requirements of 00744 of the 2008 Oregon Standard Specifications for Construction. 2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320 or AASHTO MP 1a,PG 64-22 or PG 70-22 B. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control,registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid,or wettable powder form. B. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI#97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint. 1. Color: White or to match existing. 2.4 MIXES A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction and complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide mixes conforming to section 00744 of the 2008 Oregon Standard Specifications for Construction. 2. Base Course: Level 3, 1/2-inch dense,HMAC 3. Surface Course: Level 3, 1/2-inch dense,HMAC PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. B. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PATCHING A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade. B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new,hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq.yd. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. ASPHALT PAVING 13117 SECTION 32 12 16-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ASPHALT PAVING C. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch and,while still hot,compact flush with adjacent surface. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry,prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials. C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq.yd. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. 3.4 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade,cross section,and thickness when compacted. 1. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 2. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt-paving mat. B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 3.5 JOINTS A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions,with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints,in successive courses,a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Offset transverse joints,in successive courses,a minimum of 24 inches. 4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either"bulkhead"or"papered" method according to AI MS-22,for both"Ending a Lane"and"Resumption of Paving Operations." 3.6 COMPACTION A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F. ASPHALT PAVING 13117 SECTION 32 12 16-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ASPHALT PAVING B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown,grade,and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041,but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent. D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm. E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot;compact thoroughly. F. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. G. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch,no minus. B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch. 3.8 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken. C. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. ASPHALT PAVING 13117 SECTION 32 12 16-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON ASPHALT PAVING 3.10 DISPOSAL A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. END OF SECTION ASPHALT PAVING 13117 SECTION 32 12 16-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. Curbs and gutters. 2. Walkways. 3. Equipment pads. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans,and ground granulated blast-furnace slag. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Admixtures. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 6. Joint fillers. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. CONCRETE PAVING 13117 SECTION 32 13 13- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONCRETE PAVING PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth,continuous,straight,smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet or less. B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M,Grade 60;deformed. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. C. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M,Grade 60,deformed. D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars,welded wire reinforcement,and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire,plastic,or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete,and as follows: 1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618,Class C. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type A. 2. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type D. 3. High-Range,Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type F. CONCRETE PAVING 13117 SECTION 32 13 13-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONCRETE PAVING 2.4 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq.yd.dry. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171,polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterbome, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,Type 1,Class B. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion-and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751,asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces,of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to requirements. 2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures,proportioned according to ACI 301,for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete mixture designs for the trial batch method. B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 3000 psi. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches,or less. C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: 1. Air Content: 4 percent to 7 percent for 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F,reduce mixing and delivery time from 1- 1/2 hours to 75 minutes;when air temperature is above 90 deg F,reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading,and elevation tolerances. CONCRETE PAVING 13117 SECTION 32 13 13 -3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONCRETE PAVING B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. 1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. 3. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch require correction according to requirements in Division 31 Section"Earth Moving." C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines,grades,and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale,earth,ice,or other bond-reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline,unless otherwise indicated. 1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 3. Butt Joints: Use epoxy bonding adhesive at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. CONCRETE PAVING 13117 SECTION 32 13 13-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONCRETE PAVING 5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins,manholes,inlets,structures,walks,other fixed objects,and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. 6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness,as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade,or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. 3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring,mixing,transporting,and placing concrete. E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. G. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. H. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading,rodding,or tamping. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement,dowels,and joint devices. CONCRETE PAVING 13117 SECTION 32 13 13-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONCRETE PAVING Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete,strike off,and screed. 1. Remove and replace concrete that has been placed for more than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer,or use bonding agent if approved by Architect. J. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. K. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. L. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved,remove and replace with formed concrete. M. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement,submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to required thickness, lines,grades,finish,and jointing as required for formed pavement. 1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of paver machine during operations. N. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost,freezing actions,or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F,uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 90 deg F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. O. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water,soft spots,or dry areas. 3.7 FLOAT FINISHING A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats,or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. CONCRETE PAVING 13117 SECTION 32 13 13-6 PERM1r SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONCRETE PAVING 1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform,fine-line texture. C. Edging:Tool edges of pavement,gutters,curbs,and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4 inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete,but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing,moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover,water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete,placed in widest practicable width,with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.9 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 1. Elevation: 1/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch,minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot-long,unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch. 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch. 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch. 6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch. 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 8. Joint Spacing: 1/2 inch. 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch,no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch,no minus. CONCRETE PAVING 13117 SECTION 32 13 13-7 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONCRETE PAVING 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture,testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above,and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2 specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2 specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days. C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number,date of concrete placement,name of concrete testing and inspecting agency,location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength,and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer,sonoscope,or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. H. Additional testing and inspecting,at Contractor's expense,will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. CONCRETE PAVING 13117 SECTION 32 13 13-8 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON CONCRETE PAVING B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains,discoloration,dirt,and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. END OF SECTION CONCRETE PAVING 13117 SECTION 32 13 13-9 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON IRRIGATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work of this Section includes all labor and materials necessary to modify the permanent irrigation system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1. Work of this Section is to be bidder designed. B. The Work includes,but is not limited to,the following: 1. Piping. 2. Valves. 3. Controllers and other control elements. 4. Conduits and raceways for electrical control wiring. 5. Sprinkler heads. C. Related Documents and Sections: 1. Section 01 56 39;Temporary Plant Protection. 2. Section 31 10 00; Site Clearing. 3. Section 31 20 00;Earthwork. 4. Section 32 91 13; Soil Preparation. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Bidder Design: Design 100 percent coverage irrigation system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, as an extension to the existing system using the same performance requirements and design criteria. B. Irrigation zone control shall be automatic operation with controller and automatic control valves. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Bidder-Design Submittal: Extension to existing irrigation system, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B. Record Copy Drawings: During the course of installation,carefully show all field changes in red line on a print of the irrigation system as installed. This drawing shall be labeled "Record Copy", and shall be made available for inspection. C. Upon completion of the Work of this Section and as a condition of its acceptance, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative the following: 1. As-Built Drawings: Submit three prints and one reproducible and/or electronic file of as-built drawings. As-built drawings shall clearly show all original components of the Record Copy and all changes documented in the Record Copy. Main lines and sleeves shall be positively located by a minimum of two dimensions each from fixed reference points. IRRIGATION 13117 SECTION 32 80 00- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON IRRIGATION 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall store all PVC pipe and fittings out of direct sunlight and protect from physical damage. B. The Contractor shall store and protect all specified components from adverse weather conditions until installation is complete. C. The Contractor shall handle all components as directed by the manufacturer's handling and installation instructions. Damage from transportation or other handling of materials shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. D. All local,municipal and state laws and rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications and the Contractor shall carry out their provisions. Any specification herein contained,shall not be construed to conflict with the above rules,regulations or requirements. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Inspection: The Contractor shall inspect the site prior to construction and verify the locations of components of the existing irrigation system and the extent of the Work required. Commencement of construction by the Contractor designates acceptance of the site conditions apparent at outset. The Contractor shall obtain approval to access system components for inspection prior to commencement of construction. B. The Contractor shall verify the locations of all existing utilities, structures, and services before commencing work.The location of utilities,structures and services shown on these plans are approximate only. Any discrepancies between these plans and the actual field conditions shall be reported to the Owner's representative immediately. C. Weather Limitations: Soil work shall be performed only when weather conditions do not detrimentally affect the quality of work. D. Project Limits: Areas,as specified within which work is to be performed. E. The Contractor shall protect all areas of work defined on the drawings and any existing on-site vegetation,structures,utilities,etc. All damage as a result of work under this contract shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of traffic control,barricades, safety guards, and any other structures or improvements necessary for the complete protection of the public. The Contractor shall verify non-potable water sources and install labeled components as required by state and federal laws. F. The Contractor shall verify, locate and protect all existing utilities and features on and adjacent to the project site during construction and shall repair, at their own expense; all damage as a result of construction activities. G. The Contractor shall,at all times,take adequate precautions to keep rock,dirt,gravel,debris,and all other foreign materials from entering piping,valves and other irrigation equipment. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. B. Verify that sleeving and other conduits,of sizes and types specified,are installed as required. C. When necessary during construction the Contractor shall make arrangements for irrigation shutoff through the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall provide complete temporary irrigation to all landscape areas affected by the shut-off,during normal watering seasons. IRRIGATION 13117 SECTION 32 80 00-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON IRRIGATION 1.8 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor guarantees that all new irrigation components installed, as part of this work shall be free from defects in materials, design and workmanship for a period of one year from the Date of Substantial Completion. B. Upon notice from the Owner's Representative of failure on any part of this equipment during the guarantee period,due to faulty installation procedures,new replacement parts shall be promptly furnished and installed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Damages to property or site improvements resulting from the failure of specified components shall be repaired promptly, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for grade settlement, and/or erosion of soil surfaces resulting from defects in irrigation installation throughout the specified warranty period. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and equipment shall be new, delivered to site in original factory condition, and as specified in this section. 2.2 PLASTIC PIPE A. All plastic pipe shall be polyvinyl chloride(PVC)continuously bearing the seal of the National Sanitation Foundation,with the exception of polyethylene pipe specified as follows. B. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)pipe 1. Lateral Lines: PVC Class 200, Type 1, white, NSF approved, solvent weld pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM D2241-00. 2. Main Lines: PVC Class 200 , Type 1, white, NSF approved, solvent weld pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM D2241-00. 3. Sleeves: a. Sleeves installed beneath asphalt paving: PVC Schedule 40 pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM D2241-00. b. Sleeves installed beneath walls and walkways: PVC Schedule 40 pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM D2241-00. c. Sized per the requirements of the irrigation system. C. Electrical Conduit: PVC Schedule 40 electrical conduit, standard weight; minimum 1 1/2-inch (38mm) nominal diameter unless otherwise required. D. Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings: Flexible,thick walled designed to withstand 400 psi burst pressure test. Sized per manufacturer's specified velocity tolerances. 2.3 GALVANIZED PIPE A. Galvanized pipe shall be threaded and hot dip galvanized standard steel pipe Schedule 40 standard weight. IRRIGATION 13117 SECTION 32 80 00-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON IRRIGATION 2.4 PLASTIC FITTINGS A. For Polyethylene Pipe: As specified by manufacturer of polyethylene pipe. B. For PVC Class 200 Pipe: PVC Schedule 40 meeting the requirements of ASTM D2466-01. C. For PVC Schedule 40 Pipe:Schedule 80 meeting the requirements of ASTM D2464-99 PVC. 2.5 GALVANIZED FITTINGS A. Galvanized fittings shall be threaded and hot dip galvanized standard steel Schedule 40 standard weight. 2.6 PIPE JOINING COMPOUNDS A. Cement and Primer for Solvent Weld Joints: As recommended by manufacturer of PVC pipe. B. Teflon Tape for Threaded Joints(PVC or galvanized): DuPont or approved equal. 2.7 ELECTRIC CONTROL WIRE AND CONNECTORS A. Wire: Single strand copper, UL approved for direct burial. Sized in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Control (hot) wires shall be red and common (ground) wire shall be white. Spare wire shall be black. B. Wire Connectors and Sealant: UL approved for direct burial. 2.8 VALVES,FILTERS,PRESSURE REGULATORS A. Bronze Gate Valves: MSS SP-80, Class 125, Type 1, nonrising-stem, bronze body with solid wedge, threaded ends,and malleable-iron handwheel. Available Manufacturers: B. Manual Isolation Valves: Bronze Globe Valves: MSS SP-80, Class 125, Type 2, with bronze body and nonmetallic disc.Available Manufacturers: C. Remote Control Valve(s): Remote Control Valve: Glass-filled nylon body with pressure compensation module, forward flow design and of a size and type to sufficiently operate system. Water volumes and velocity through valve shall not exceed manufacturer's recommended optimum performance criteria. D. Manual Drain Valve: 3/4-inch(19-mm) size bronze angle valve with rising stem and cross-type handle. Hammond,Buckner or approved equal. E. Quick Coupling Valve and Accessories: as shown on drawings with key, and Swivel hose ell of same manufacture,or approved equal. 2.9 VALVE BOXES A. Plastic valve box with locking lid, sized to provide a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm)clear on all sides of the valve to facilitate access,maintenance,repair or removal. Ametek,Carson,or approved equal. 2.10 SPRINKLERS A. Sprinkler heads shall match existing sprinkler heads. B. Underground closed-case rotary or spray heads,sufficient to apply specified precipitation rates. All spray heads shall be equipped with pressure compensating devices. All irrigation heads in low points must be equipped with integral check-valves to prevent`low-head seepage'. C. Where necessary to control zone drainage, at the bottom of slope areas, install low-head drainage bodies on lowest heads in zone. D. Pop-up riser heights shall match existing sprinkler heads at similar conditions. IRRIGATION 13117 SECTION 32 80 00-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON IRRIGATION 2.11 OTHER MATERIALS A. Gravel: 3/4-inch minus,washed,crushed rock. B. Tracer Wire: Alarmatape or approved equal. C. Pipe Backfill: Clean, dry, friable topsoil void of stones larger than 1" in diameter and other material deleterious to specified pipe. Soil shall be suitable for compaction to eliminate settlement conditions of specified finish grades. D. All other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper irrigation system installation, shall be new and of first quality and must be approved by the Owner's Representative prior to installation on site. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prior to all Work of this Section, the Contractor shall carefully inspect all previously installed work and verify that all such work is complete to the point where specified installation may properly commence. B. Verify that irrigation system may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the accepted design,the referenced standards,and the manufacturer's specifications. 3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Trench depths shall provide minimum covers per details: 1. 12 inches for lateral lines; 2. 18 inches for main lines or sub-mains; 3. 18 inches for sleeving beneath walkways; 4. 24 inches for sleeving beneath vehicular traffic(or as directed by jurisdiction). B. Depth of trenching shall avoid interference with waterlines and other utilities(verify),and shall allow for a four-inch vertical clearance between pipes. C. Trench bottoms shall have uniform slopes with one percent minimum slope towards drain valves. Trench bottom shall be free of rocks or sharp-edged objects. Stones larger than one-inch in diameter are not allowed in the backfill material. Compact to adjacent soil density. Keep trenches free of debris, during construction. D. Pipe Connections: Do not use solvent cement on threaded joints. Wrap threads with minimum of three wraps of Teflon tape in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Tighten fittings only to manufacturer's specifications. Follow manufacturer's instructions for solvent welding of PVC pipe and fittings to achieve tight and inseparable joints. 3.3 PIPE PULLING A. Installation of pipe and wires by means of vibratory plow may be used as an alternate to standard trenching methods if approved by the Owner's Representative. B. Vibratory pipe pulling shall only be allowed on 3/4 inch and 1 inch diameter piping only. C. Solvent weld joints shall be thoroughly cured prior to pipe pulling. D. The Contractor shall ensure,by means of an open pit or trench at the beginning, middle, and the end of pull,that pipe and wire is installed at the specified burial depths throughout the entire length of the pull. Burial depths shall be the same as specified for trenching. E. Allow a minimum of five chain links between plow blade and pulling grip/bullet. IRRIGATION 13117 SECTION 32 8000-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON IRRIGATION F. Pulling grip/bullet shall be a minimum of two-inch in diameter greater than the combined diameters of pipe joints and wire to be pulled. G. Wire pulling shall only occur with proper wire blade feed attachment. 3.4 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Solvent weld PVC pipes only during non-freezing weather. Solvent weld PVC pipes only under cover in rainy weather. Do not allow flooding of welded piping until specified cure time has elapsed. B. Air temperature of PVC mating surfaces for plastic pipe and fittings shall be between 40 degrees F and 100 degrees C. Do not use solvent cement on threaded joints. Wrap threads with minimum of three wraps of Teflon tape in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. D. Follow manufacturer's instructions for solvent welding of PVC pipe and fittings to achieve tight and inseparable joints. E. Cementing Plastic Pipe: 1. Cut all ends squarely with approved pipe cutting tool. Bevel ends with a deburring tool. 2. Clean all pipe ends prior to assembly. 3. Clear all pipe lengths of dirt and debris. Protect from contamination. 4. Do not use excess primer and solvent when joining pipe ends. 5. Insert pipe ends to full depth of fitting,hold tightly as necessary to insure full depth bonding. 6. Allow 15 minutes curing time following joint assembly prior to moving or handling jointed pipe. 3.5 BACKFILLING A. The Contractor shall completely fill trench with native material free of stones and other debris greater than 1 inch in diameter. In all turf areas, shrub beds and other planting areas backfill material shall conform to the specified soil mix to the depths indicated in Division 32 requirements for soil preparation. The Contractor must fill all voids and tamp thoroughly in compacted layers of 6 inches at a time. The Contractor shall place and compact soil to eliminate settling of final trench grades. The Contractor shall backfill trenches only after main and lateral line inspection and testing and after receiving written approval from Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 hours in advance when requesting inspection. 3.6 DRAIN VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install one manual drain valve at discharge side of each remote control valve and at all low points in main line pipe to allow for complete drainage of all main lines. B. Install drain valves as shown on drawings. 3.7 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install as shown on drawings. B. Install specified quick coupling valve,in specified box,at point of connection,and as shown and noted on plans. C. Valve and valve box locations shall be located in a manner so as not to interrupt plant massing or groups, hedge lines,or otherwise alter the character of the proposed plantings. 1. Place valves and valve boxes in low growing ground cover areas offset from adjacent paving by a minimum of 2 times the specified ground cover spacing. IRRIGATION 13117 SECTION 32 80 00-6 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 i 1 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON IRRIGATION 2. In public areas where valves or valve boxes may be readily visible to the public, verify their location with Owner's Representative prior to installation. 3.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Comply with state and local codes. Conceal in planting beds where possible. 3.9 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION A. Install controller in accordance with manufacturer's specifications, and respective State and Local codes. Install at location as shown on drawings. Notify Owner's Representative prior to installation,of conflicts or complications with specified controller locations. 3.10 ELECTRICAL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Run all 24-volt direct burial service wires for remote valves in electrical conduit from the bottom of the controller to the outside of the structure,per State and Local codes. B. Run all service wire through sleeves under all paving and at 15 foot intervals,bundle together all 24-VAC wiring using standard electrical wire ties,i.e.,TYTON No.T-50-R Nylon,one-piece molded,self-locking tie, 1/4 inch(nominal width). It is not required to secure wiring to the main line. Lay"bundled" wiring close to and alongside the PVC main line (or lateral) to remove the damage hazards from backfill and maintenance operations. C. A spare(black)wire shall be run from the controller past farthest remote control valve(s)in the field,but not connected at inside of valve box. At controller and at each remote control valve, provide as a minimum an 18 inches loop in the spare wire,and label"Spare Wire". D. Tracer wire or tape shall be installed along the top of all main lines and specified pipes of nonmetallic composition. Tape to piping at 20 foot intervals with standard black 3/4 inch electrical tape. E. Install all wire in accordance with manufacturer's specifications with a minimum of 18-inches of wire looped inside the valve box at each remote control valve and at the controller. F. All wire splicing shall occur only within valve or junction boxes. Splices shall be made waterproof by following manufacturer's instructions for wire connectors and sealant. 3.11 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. B. Install all sprinklers on flexible risers,using flexible polyethylene pipe or PVC swing joints. C. Sprinklers located on slopes which are less than three percent shall be installed plumb. Those that are located on slopes greater than three percent shall be installed at an angle midway between plumb and perpendicular to the slope. 3.12 SYSTEM FLUSHING A. After piping, risers, and valves are installed, but prior to installing sprinkler heads, thoroughly flush piping system under full water head. B. Maintain flushing for five minutes or until water flows clearly. C. Cap risers immediately after flushing. 3.13 PRESSURE TESTING A. Conduct test in presence of Owner's Representative. IRRIGATION 13117 SECTION 32 80 00-7 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON IRRIGATION B. Test shall be conducted with backflow prevention, quick couplers, control valves and manual drains in place and prior to backfilling. Laterals will be visually inspected for proper solvent welds and leaks prior to backfilling but no pressure test will be required. C. Piping must not lose more than 4 psi after 60 minutes at 125 psi. D. Correct defects and retest until Owner's Representative approves. E. Notify Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 hours in advance when requesting inspection of pressure test. 3.14 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING A. Calculate three irrigation programs: Spring / Early Summer, Summer, Late Summer/ Fall. System operation requirements shall be based on annual precipitation rates, plant material maturation requirements,solar exposure,and topography and soil conditions. B. Submit seasonal controller operation program with as-built record drawings and include laminated copy of program at controller location in controller cabinet. Include total application quantities in inches per week for all zones,for establishment period and normal system operation. 3.15 FINAL INSPECTION A. Thoroughly clean, adjust and balance the installed irrigation system. Adjust spray pattern of nozzles to reduce throw of water onto buildings, structures, vehicles, and paved surfaces. Monitor and re-adjust system operation until components operate continually as specified. B. The Contractor shall operate the system in the presence of the Owner's Representative to demonstrate satisfactory performance and coverage. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative a minimum of 48 hours advance notice when requesting fmal inspection. C. The Contractor shall demonstrate complete operation of the system, including controller-operating program, start-up and winterizing procedures, and deliver all supplemental equipment to the Owner's designated operating personnel. END OF SECTION IRRIGATION 13117 SECTION 32 80 00-8 PERMIT SET 1 1.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SOIL PREPARATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. The Work covered in this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment for testing, preparation, and placement of topsoil and compost as indicated by the drawings and as specified. 2. Coordinate placement of topsoil and required soil amendments with the establishment of rough grades. 3. Coordinate depths of soil amendments and topsoil with grading specifications for rough and finish grades. 4. All rough grading operations shall be completed as required by these specifications. Topsoil placement or backfilling in areas to be landscaped shall not occur until the Owner's Representative has issued written approval of the rough grade and topsoil. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Soil classifications standards used herein for existing and imported soils include but are not limited to the following: 1. ASTM Soil Quality Standards: 2. Classification:ASTM D 2487-00 3. Gradation of Soils: ASTM D 422-63(1998) 4. Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index: ASTM D 4318-94(2001)el 5. Moisture-Density Relations: ASTM D 1557-00 6. Permeability of Soils:ASTM D 2434-68(2000) B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. C. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. D. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps,gravel,and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of weeds,roots,and toxic and other nonsoil materials. Obtain topsoil only from well-drained sites where topsoil is 4 inches deep or more;do not obtain from bogs or marshes. E. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil;mixed with soil amendments. F. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation,or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. At least 7 working days prior to use on site or the start of work,the Contractor shall submit the following information to the Owner's Representative. SOIL PREPARATION 13117 SECTION 32 91 13- 1 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SOIL PREPARATION 1. Certified analysis of compost mixture components required by these specifications. 2. Guaranteed analysis of fertilizer mixes. 3. Certified analysis of on-site or imported topsoil required by these specifications. 4. Available Testing Laboratories: a. Soil and Plant Laboratory,Inc.—www.soilandplantlaboratory.com b. Western Agricultural Laboratories—www.al-labs-west.com 5. Where any tests show results failing to conform to the required standards the Contractor shall include with the testing report a recommended treatment plan to bring the material into conformance. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Soil Preparation: All soil preparation work shall be done under the supervision of a Contractor having experience in landscape construction. All work shall be done in accordance with proper horticultural practices. B. Herbicide Application: Applications of herbicide for weed control,as required, shall be made only by an applicator currently licensed under State and Federal law. C. The Contractor shall store fertilizer and other required materials in a dry place and free from the intrusion of moisture. D. All topsoil and compost must be tested by an independent testing laboratory and certified that it is in conformance with the requirements of these specifications. E. Soil/Compost Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. F. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; deleterious material; pH;and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil 1. Topsoil Analysis Report must include analysis of suitability of topsoil for plant growth. 2. State recommended quantities of nitrogen,phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory topsoil. G. Compost Analysis: Furnish compost analysis by a qualified testing laboratory stating the volumes, quantities,and ratios of component parts specified. 1. Compost Analysis Report must include analysis of suitability of compost for plant growth. 2. State volumes and quantities of recommended amendments necessary to produce satisfactory compost. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Prior to the Work of this Section all rough graded surfaces shall be free of: 1. Concrete,asphalt,and other construction debris; 2. Limbs,twigs,cones,seed-pods and other woody material;and 3. Rock,gravel or other material not suitable for plant growth. SOIL PREPARATION 13117 SECTION 32 91 13-2 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SOIL PREPARATION B. In all plant bed areas the sub-grade shall be free of unsuitable material such as stumps, roots, rocks, concrete, asphalt, or metals, for a minimum depth of 24 inches and in all lawn or seeded areas the sub- grade shall be free of unsuitable material for a minimum depth of 12 inches. C. The Contractor shall provide protective covers and barriers as necessary to prevent damage and staining to all site improvements. D. The Contractor shall prepare topsoil only when weather and soil conditions allow. Do not attempt soil preparation work when weather or soil conditions would contribute to poor or improper mixing,voids,or other adverse conditions. E. The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent runoff of topsoil and fertilizers from leaving site or entering storm systems,or any waterway. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULE A. Coordinate soil preparation work with installation of other site improvements and planting of trees, shrubs,ground covers and lawns. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANTING SOILS A. Planting Soil: AST/v1 D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4. 2. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq.Ft.(92.9 Sq.m): As indicated by soils report. 3. Weight of Sulfur per 1000 Sq.Ft.(92.9 Sq.m): As indicated by soils report. 4. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq.Ft.(92.9 Sq.m): As indicated by soils report. 5. Volume of Sand Plus 10 Percent 1000 Sq.Ft.(92.9 Sq.m): As indicated by soils report. 6. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq.Ft.(92.9 Sq.,m): As indicated by soils report. 7. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq.Ft.(92.9 Sq.m): As indicated by soils report. B. Planting Soil Textural Class Requirements: Topsoil textural analysis shall fall within the following gradations: Textural Class %of Total Weight Average% Sand(0.05-2.0mm dia.) 45-75 60 Silt(0.002-0.05mm dia.) 15-35 25 Clay(less than 0.002mm dia.) 05-20 15 C. Planting Soil: Existing, native surface topsoil formed under natural conditions with the duff layer retained during excavation process. Verify suitability of native surface topsoil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots,plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Supplement with another specified planting soil when quantities are insufficient. 2. Mix existing,native surface topsoil with the following soil amendments in the following quantities to produce planting soil(refer to Item A for composition): SOIL PREPARATION 13117 SECTION 32 91 13-3 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 r PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SOIL PREPARATION 2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1. Class: Class T, with a minimum 99 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum 75 percent passing through No.60 sieve. 2. Class: Class 0, with a minimum 95 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum 55 percent passing through No.60 sieve. 3. Provide lime in form of dolomitic limestone. B. Sulfur: Granular,biodegradable,containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur,with a minimum 99 percent passing through No.6 sieve and a maximum 10 percent passing through No.40 sieve. C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur. D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade,unadulterated. E. Agricultural Gypsum: Finely ground,containing a minimum of 90 percent calcium sulfate. F. Sand: Clean,washed,natural or manufactured,free of toxic materials. G. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, diatomaceous earth, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight. 2.3 COMPOST A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter,pH range of 5.5 to 8;moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source- separated or compostable mixed solid waste. B. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture,free of chips,stones,sticks,soil,or toxic materials. C. Manure: Well-rotted,unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw,sawdust,or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances,stones,sticks,soil,weed seed,and material harmful to plant growth. 2.4 MULCH A. Bark Mulch: Dark hemlock bark, 1-inch minus size with less than 30% bark finer than 1/4-inch size. Sawdust and wood shavings will not be acceptable. 2.5 PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDE A. Pre-emergent herbicide shall be as directed for condition by currently licensed herbicide applicator. 2.6 POST-EMERGENT HERBICIDE A. Post-emergent herbicide shall be as directed for condition by currently licensed herbicide applicator. B. Care should be taken to limit runoff when spraying in swale areas. SOIL PREPARATION 13117 SECTION 32 91 13-4 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SOIL PREPARATION 2.7 WATER A. Water shall be suitable for irrigation, free from oil, acid, alkali, salt or other substances harmful to plant life. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. The Contractor shall examine the entire site for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence and quality of work, and survival of plant materials. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Rough Grading Inspection: Contractor shall notify Owner's Representative a minimum of 72 hours in advance for inspection of rough grades. C. The Contractor shall verify that rough grades and slopes of areas to be planted areas are set at sufficient depth to allow for placement of specified materials. If the site is not suitable for landscaping operations, the Contractor shall perform necessary corrective work. 3.2 GENERAL PREPARATION OF GROUND SURFACES—ALL PLANTING OR SEEDING AREAS A. The Contractor shall eliminate uneven areas and low spots, remove lumber, stones, sticks, mortar, concrete, rubbish, debris, contaminated soil and any other material harmful to plant life, in shrub and ground cover beds. B. The Contractor shall verify that invasive species and weeds have been eliminated prior to the placement of topsoil. The Contractor must not place topsoil until all living weed matter has been eliminated. C. Weed eradication shall include herbicide and non-herbicide methods. Eradication shall include and is not limited to elimination of the following invasive species and weeds; Cirsium arvense(Canadian Thistle) Convolvulus spp. (Morning Glory) Cytisus scoparus(Scotch Broom) Dipsacus sylvestris (Common Teasel) Festuca arundinaceae(Tall Fescue) Hedera helix(English Ivy) Holcus canatus (Velvet Grass) Lolium spp. (Rye Grasses) Lotus corniculatus (Bird's Foot Trefoil) Lythrium salicaria (Purple Loose Strife) Melilotus spp. (Sweet Clover) Myriophyllum spicatum (Eurasian Milfoil) Phalaris arundinaceae(Reed Canary Grass) Rubus discolor(Himalayan Blackberry) Solarium spp.(Nightshade) Trifolium spp.(Clovers) 1. Herbicide application shall be by manual 'spot spraying', wicking, or backpack methods per manufacturer's specifications. 2. Herbicide application shall be as directed by a currently licensed applicator and shall be strictly applied by manufacturer's specifications,and applicable codes and regulations. SOIL PREPARATION 13117 SECTION 32 91 13-5 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SOIL PREPARATION 3. Remove invasive plant material after herbicide application has effectively stopped plant growth. Dispose legally off-site. 4. After initial spraying and removal of weeds,and prior to placing topsoil,the contractor shall water the subgrade sufficiently to germinate dormant weed seeds. a. Prior to this weed crop producing seeds, the contractor shall spray these weeds with herbicide and remove them from the site. b. Before continuing with topsoil placement the contractor shall verify with the Owner's Representative whether or not to repeat this treatment. 5. Selective hand removal by non-herbicide methods shall be utilized if herbicide application threatens existing plantings. 6. Existing or new plantings damaged or killed by herbicide application shall be replaced immediately at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.3 PLACING PLANTING SOILS A. Planting soils shall be placed in minimum depths of 6 inches in planting beds, and 3 inches in seeded lawn areas. B. Verify that planting soil is stockpiled in sufficient quantities to be placed at depths specified. The Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative immediately if supplies are inadequate or do not meet specifications for topsoil. The Contractor shall provided imported topsoil meeting the requirements of this Section if the supply of existing on-site topsoil is insufficient. C. Planting soil shall be placed at specified grades between any existing or constructed points on the site, such as curbs,walls,walks and paving. 3.4 SOIL PREPARATION IN PLANTING BEDS A. Loosen subgrade of planting beds to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. a. Spread approximately one-half the thickness of planting soil mix over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil mix. B. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture.Roll and rake,remove ridges,and fill depressions to meet finish grades. C. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting. D. Mulch all planting beds with a 2-inch layer of mulch material within two (2) days after planting. Cover entire bed areas;apply evenly. 3.5 CLEANUP A. Keep project site free from accumulation of debris,topsoil,and other material. B. At completion of each area of work,completely remove debris,equipment and surplus materials. SOIL PREPARATION 13117 SECTION 32 91 13-6 PERMIT SET 11.08.13 PAC TRUST PACIFIC PARKWAY CENTER PORTLAND,OREGON SOIL PREPARATION C. Any paved area or surfaces stained or soiled from landscaping materials shall be cleaned with a power sweeper using water under pressure. Building surfaces shall be washed with proper equipment and materials as approved by the Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION SOIL PREPARATION 13117 SECTION 32 91 13-7 PERMIT SET 11.08.13